Note: Descriptions are shown in the official language in which they were submitted.
DEMANDE OU BREVET VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND
PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME 1 DE 3
CONTENANT LES PAGES 1 A 122
NOTE : Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des
brevets
JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE
VOLUME
THIS IS VOLUME 1 OF 3
CONTAINING PAGES 1 TO 122
NOTE: For additional volumes, please contact the Canadian Patent Office
NOM DU FICHIER / FILE NAME:
NOTE POUR LE TOME / VOLUME NOTE:
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
INFORMATION-PRESENTATION STRUCTURE
WITH TEMPORARY COLOR CHANGE AT OBJECT-IMPACT AREA
By
Ronald J. Meetin
FIELD OF USE
[0001] This invention relates to information presentation, especially for
sports such as tennis.
BACKGROUND
[0002] Two sides, each consisting of at least one player, compete against
each other in a typical sport
played with an object, such as a ball, which moves above a playing surface and
often impacts the surface.
Exemplary sports include tennis and basketball. The playing surface, referred
to as a court, consists of an
inbounds (IB") playing area and an out-of-bounds ('OB") playing area
demarcated by boundary lines. When
the object impacts the OB area, the side that caused the object to go out of
bounds is typically penalized. In
tennis, a point is awarded to the other side. In basketball, possession of the
basketball is awarded to the other
side. Decisions as to whether the object impacts the playing surface in or out
of bounds are often difficult to
make for impacts close to the boundary lines.
[0003] Additionally, the 1B area typically contains internal lines that
place certain requirements on the
sport. For instance, a tennis court contains three internal lines which,
together with the tennis net and a pair of
the boundary lines, define four servicecourts into which a tennis ball must be
appropriately served to avoid a
penalty against the server. It is often difficult to determine whether a
served tennis ball impacting the playing
surface close to one of these lines is "in" or "out". Each half of a
basketball court usually has a three-point line.
At least one shoe of a player shooting the basketball must contact the court
behind the three-point line
immediately prior to the shot with neither of the shooter's shoes touching the
court on or inside the three-point
line as the shot is taken for it to be eligible for three points. It is
likewise difficult to determine whether this
requirement is met when the shoes are close to the three-point line.
[0004] Returning to tennis, Fig. 1 illustrates the layout of playing
surface 20 of a standard tennis court with
line width somewhat exaggerated. For singles, playing surface 20 consists of
rectangular IB playing area 22
and OB playing area 24 edgewise surrounding IB playing area 22 and extending
to court boundary 26. Singles
IB playing area 22 is defined inwardly by two opposite equal-width parallel
straight baselines 28 and two
opposite equal-width parallel straight singles sidelines 30 extending between
baselines 28. Tennis net 32 is
- 1 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
situated above a straight net line, usually imaginary but potentially real,
extending parallel to baselines 28
substantially midway between them and extending lengthwise between and beyond
singles sidelines 30 for
dividing singles 1B area 22 into two singles half courts.
[0005] Singles 1B area 22 contains (i) two opposite equal-width parallel
straight servicelines 34 situated
between baselines 28 and extending lengthwise between singles sidelines 30 at
equal distances from the
imaginary or real net line and (ii) straight centerline 36 extending
lengthwise between servicelines 34 at equal
distances from singles sidelines 30. Lines 30, 34, and 36 in combination with
the imaginary/real net line, and
thus effectively net 32, define inwardly four equal-size rectangular services
courts 38. Lines 28, 30, and 34
define two equal-size rectangular backcourts 40.
[0006] Playing surface 20 for doubles consists of IB playing area 42 and OB
playing area 44 edgewise
surrounding IB playing area 42 and extending to court boundary 26. Doubles IB
playing area 42 is defined
inwardly by baselines 28 and opposite equal-width straight doubles sidelines
46 located outside singles IB area
22. The imaginary/real net line situated below net 32 extends lengthwise
between and beyond doubles sidelines
46 for dividing doubles IB area 42 into two doubles half courts. Net 32
extends fully across 1B area 42 and into
OB area 44. Rectangular doubles alleys 48 extend along doubles sidelines 46
outside singles sidelines 30. Fig.
2 is a less-labeled version of Fig. 1 in which roughly elliptical items 50, of
somewhat exaggerated size, represent
examples of areas where tennis balls, including just-served tennis balls,
contact playing surface 20 and which
are variously so close to the tennis lines that it may be difficult to make
decisions, referred to as "line calls", on
whether the balls are "in" or "out".
[0007] Players and tennis officials variously make line calls in tennis
depending on the availability of
officials. Numerous devices, including camera-based devices, have been
investigated to assist in making line
calls. One notable camera-based device is the Hawk-Eye system in which a group
of video cameras in
conjunction with a computer track moving tennis balls to provide simulations
of their trajectories and predictions
of their court contact areas. See Geiger, "How Tennis Can Save Soccer: Hawk-
Eye Crossing Sports", Illumin,
25 Mar. 2013,3 pp. Fig. 3 illustrates an example of simulated trajectory 60 of
tennis ball 62 tracked with Hawk-
Eye on one stroke. Fig. 4 depicts simulated contact area 64 of ball 62 near a
sideline 30 on another stroke. As
Fig. 4 indicates, Hawk-Eye provides a visual notification specifying whether
ball 62 is in or out.
[0008] The Hawk-Eye simulations are displayed on a screen at which players
(and officials) look to see the
line calls. This disrupts play. As a result, Hawk-Eye is used for only certain
line calls. In particular, officials
initially make all line calls with each side allocated a small number of
opportunities to challenge official-made
calls per set provided that a challenge opportunity is retained if an official-
made call is reversed. The use of
challenges is distracting to the players. Hawk-Eye's accuracy depends on the
accuracy of the predictive data
analysis for the simulations and on Hawk-Eye's alignment to the tennis lines,
assumed to be perfectly straight
even though they are not perfectly straight. Hawk-Eye appears to occasionally
make erroneous calls as
- 2 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
discussed, e.g., in "Hawk-Eye", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.orgiwikilHawk-Eye, 18
July 2013, 8 pp. While Hawk-
Eye has gained high recognition among the camera-based devices, it is
desirable to have a better device than
Hawk-Eye or any other camera-based device for making line calls.
[0009] Line-calling systems utilizing tennis balls with special electrical
or chemical treatments have been
proposed as, e.g., disclosed in U.S. Patents 4,109,911 and 7,632,197 B2.
However, such systems are
disadvantageous for various reasons. Erosion along the outside of a specially
treated tennis ball as it contacts
the tennis court and racquets may detrimentally affect the ball's ability to
provide the information needed to
appropriately communicate with the line-calling system. The electrical or
chemical treatments may so affect the
bounce characteristics that some tennis players are averse to using specially
treated balls. Players and officials
are generally unable to rapidly verify the accuracy of the calls.
[0010] The possibility of using piezochromic material in making line calls
has been raised, A piezochromic
material changes color upon applying suitable pressure and returns to the
original color upon releasing the
pressure. In Bradley, "Interview with Williams James Griffiths", Reactive
Reports, June 2006, 3 pp., Griffiths
proposes a thin device to be laid on a tennis court and to contain
piezochromic material that changes color upon
being impacted by a tennis ball. Griffiths mentions that (i) the piezochromic
material would have to be shielded
from ultraviolet radiation because piezochromic materials are ultraviolet
sensitive and most tennis courts are
outdoors and (ii) piezochromic materials generally undergo reverse color
change too quickly for a person to
check an impact location. Ferrara et al., "Intelligent design with chromogenic
materials", J. Intl Colour Ass'n,
val. 13, 2014, pp. 54 - 66, similarly proposes that electrochromic paint be
applied at and near the lines of a
tennis court for assistance in making line calls and that the same paint could
be used for basketball, volleyball,
and squash courts.
[0011] Tennis players are usually close to baselines 28 during much of a
tennis match. The players'
shoes would likely cause color changes near baselines 28 in a tennis court
using the piezochromic material of
Griffith or Ferrara et al. Shoe-caused color changes would sometimes partially
or fully overlap ball-caused color
changes and thereby degrade the ability of using ball-caused color changes in
making line calls.
[0012] Charlson et al., International Patent Publication WO 2011/123515,
discloses a "piezochromic"
device, perhaps better described as an electrowefting device, which changes
color in response to a force. One
embodiment is a sports tape for determining whether a tennis ball is in or
out. Other devices using
pressure/force sensing have been investigated for assistance in making line
calls as disclosed in, e.g., U.S.
Patents 3,415,517, 3,982,759, 4,365,805, 4,855,711, and 4,859,986. Line-
calling devices using other
technologies have also been investigated as, e.g., described in "Electronic
line judge", Wikipedia,
en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electronic___line judge_(tennis), 19 June 2012, 3 pp.
These other line-calling devices are
impractical for one reason or another. It is desirable for tennis and other
sports needing fast line calls to have a
practical line-calling device or system which overcomes the disadvantages of
prior art line-calling systems.
- 3 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
GENERAL DISCLOSURE OF THE INVENTION
[0013] The present invention furnishes an information-presentation
structure in which suitable impact of an
object on an exposed surface of an object-impact ("01") structure during an
activity such as a sport causes the
surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. Specifically,
a variable-color ("VC") region of the
01 structure extends to the surface at a surface zone and normally appears
along it as a principal color, An
impact-dependent ("ID") portion of the VC region responds to the object
impacting the surface zone at an ID
object-contact ('OC") area by temporarily appearing along an ID print area of
the zone as changed color
materially different from the principal color if certain conditions, described
below, are met The print area closely
matches the 00 area in size, shape, and location.
[0014] The components of the VC region in a first facet (or expression) of
the invention include a color-
change ("CC") component and an impact-sensitive ("IS") component usually at
least partially situated between
the surface zone and the CC component. An ID segment of the IS component
responds to the object impacting
the surface zone at the OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact
meets threshold impact criteria. An
ID segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing the ID
portion to temporarily appear
along the print area as the changed color.
[0015] Use of separate IS and CC components provides many benefits. More
materials are capable of
separately performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of
jointly performing them. The
ambit of colors for implementing the principal and changed colors is
increased. The two colors can be created in
different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of the IS
component, usually largely transparent,
without changing the CC component. The ruggedness for withstanding object
impacts is enhanced thereby
enabling the lifetime to be increased. The ability to select and control the
color-change timing is improved.
[0016] With the object subsequently leaving the surface zone, the color
change at the print area usually
occurs very quickly. The full forward transition delay from when the object
just completes separation from the
OC area to when the ID portion approximately first appears as the changed
color is usually no more than 0.2 s.
[0017] The CC component often contains an electrode assembly in which a
core layer lies at least partially
between a near electrode structure and a far electrode structure situated
farther from the surface zone than the
near electrode structure. Light having at least a majority component of
wavelength suitable for the principal
color normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode structure. A CC
control signal provided by the VC
region in response to the impact effect is applied between locations in the
near and far electrode structures. At
least one of these locations depends on where the object contacts the surface
zone. An ID segment of the core
layer responds to the control signal by enabling light having at least a
majority component of wavelength suitable
for color different from the principal color to temporarily leave an ID
segment of the core layer along an ID
- 4 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
segment of the near electrode structure such that the ID portion temporarily
appears along the print area as the
changed color.
[0018] Instead of having the ID segment of the CC component respond
directly to the impact effect if the
impact meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID segment of the IS component
in a second facet of the
invention provides a characteristics-identifying ('Cl) impact signal if the
threshold impact criteria are met. The
Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for the print area and
supplemental impact information for the
impact. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether
the supplemental impact
information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The supplemental
impact criteria are typically used for distinguishing between impacts for
which color change is desired and
impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color change is not
desired. The ID segment of the CC
component responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the ID
portion to temporarily appear as the
changed color. With the object subsequently leaving the surface zone, the full
forward transition delay from
when the object just completes separation from the OC area to when the ID
portion approximately first appears
as the changed color is preferably no more than 0.2 s so that the color change
at the print area occurs very
quickly.
[0019] The CC component again typically contains an electrode assembly in
which a core layer lies at
least partially between a near electrode structure and a far electrode
structure situated farther from the surface
zone than the near electrode structure. Light having at least a majority
component of wavelength suitable for the
principal color again normally leaves the core layer along the near electrode
structure. In this case, the CC
controller responds to the impact signal, if provided, by determining whether
the supplemental impact
information meets the supplemental impact criteria and, if so, by providing
the CC initiation signal applied
between a location in the near electrode structure and a location in the far
electrode structure.
[0020] The VC region contains impact-sensitive color-change ('ISCC")
structure in a third facet of the
invention where the shape of the OC area is capable of being arbitrary. A
protective structure lies at least
partially between the surface zone and the ISCC structure for protecting it
from being damaged by mailer
impacting, situated on, and/or moving along the zone. The protective structure
also preferably blocks at least
80% of externally incident ultraviolet radiation.
[0021] In a fourth facet of the invention where the principal color is
referred to as a principal surface color,
a surface structure lies between the surface zone and an interface with the
ISCC structure. The total light
normally leaving the ISCC structure along the interface is of wavelength
suitable for forming a principal internal
color. When the ID portion temporarily appears as the changed color referred
to here as the changed surface
color, the total light temporarily leaving an ID segment of the interface
spanning the ID portion along the
interface is of wavelength suitable for forming a changed internal color. One
of the internal colors is a
comparatively light color. The other is a comparatively dark color. The
surface structure absorbs light leaving
- 5 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
the ISCC structure along the interface such that the principal surface color
is darker than the light color if the
principal internal color is the light color and such that the changed surface
color is darker than the light color if
the changed internal color is the light color. This light/dark color
arrangement advantageously enables the
colors implementing the principal and changed surface colors to be
significantly varied by changing the light
absorption characteristics of the surface structure without changing the ISCC
structure. The principal and
changed surface colors can also be created in different shades by varying the
reflection characteristics of the
surface structure without changing the 1SCC structure.
[0022] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to
the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the ID segment of the ISCC structure in a fifth
facet of the invention provides a Cl
impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met The CI impact signal
identifies an expected location for the
print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact
signal, a CC controller determines
whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria
and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The supplemental impact criteria are again typically used
for distinguishing between impacts for
which color change is desired and impacts for which color change is not
desired. Except as otherwise
explained, the same applies to supplemental impact criteria described in later
facets of the invention. The ID
segment of the ISCC structure responds to the initiation signal, if provided,
by causing the ID portion to
temporarily appear as the changed color.
[0023] The VC region in a sixth facet of the invention includes pressure-
sensitive color-change ("PSCC")
structure and pressure-spreading structure lying at least partially between
the surface zone and the PSCC
structure. The pressure-spreading structure has a largely internal pressure-
spreading surface spaced apart
from the surface zone. With the shape of the OC area being capable of being
arbitrary, the pressure-spreading
structure laterally spreads pressure of the impact along a corresponding ID
distributed-pressure area of the
pressure-spreading surface. The distributed-pressure area laterally outwardly
conforms to, and is laterally larger
than, the OC area. An ID segment of the PSCC structure responds to the
resultant excess internal pressure
along the distributed-pressure area by causing the ID portion to temporarily
appear along the print area as the
changed color if the excess internal pressure along the distributed-pressure
area meets excess internal pressure
criteria, excess pressure at any location being pressure in excess of normal
pressure at that location.
[0024] In the absence of the pressure-spreading structure, the print and OC
areas would generally be
separated by a band which largely remains the principal color because the
excess surface pressure along the
band is insufficient to meet excess surface pressure criteria for causing
color change. Since (a) the pressure-
spreading surface is largely internal to the 01 structure, (b) the pressure
criteria which must be met to cause
color change are excess internal pressure criteria along the pressure-
spreading surface rather than excess
surface pressure criteria along the exposed surface, and (c) the pressure
spreading causes the excess internal
pressure to be laterally distributed more widely than the excess surface
pressure caused directly by the impact,
the thickness of the band largely remaining the principal color can be made
very small. The print area can
- 6 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
thereby match the OC area very closely in size, shape, and location. The
principal and changed colors can also
be created in different shades by varying the reflection characteristics of
the pressure-spreading structure
without changing the PSCC structure.
[0025] Instead of having the ID portion change color directly in response
to the impact if it meets the
excess internal pressure criteria, the ID segment of the PSCC structure in a
seventh facet of the invention
provides a Cl impact signal if the excess internal pressure criteria are met.
The Cl impact signal identifies an
expected location for the print area and supplemental impact information.
Responsive to the impact signal, a
CC controller determines whether the supplemental impact information meets
supplemental impact criteria and,
if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The ID segment of the PSCC structure
responds to the initiation signal, if
provided, by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear as the changed
color.
[0026] The VC region in an eighth facet of the invention includes ISCC
structure and duration-extension
("DE") structure. The ID segment of the ISCC structure responds to the object
impacting the surface zone at the
OC area by causing the ID portion to temporarily appear along the print area
as the changed color if the impact
meets the threshold impact criteria. The ID portion subsequently returns to
appearing along the print area as the
principal color.
[0027] The impact causes deformation along an ID surface deformation area
of the surface zone as the ID
portion initially appears along the print area as the changed color if the
impact meets the threshold impact
criteria. In addition, the DE structure responds to the impact by causing the
ISCC structure to deform along an
ID internal deformation area spaced apart from the surface deformation area.
This internal deformation causes
the ID portion to further temporarily appear along the print area as the
changed color if the threshold impact
criteria are met. The duration of the ID portion appearing as the changed
color is thereby extended in a
controllable manner.
[0028] The ID portion in a ninth facet of the invention responds to the
object impacting the surface zone at
the OC area, whose shape is capable of being arbitrary, by temporarily
emitting light suitable for forming color
different from the principal color if the impact meets the threshold impact
criteria such that the ID portion
temporarily appears along the print area as the changed color. Using light
emission to produce the temporary
color change at the print area is advantageous because the changed color can
be virtually any possible visible
color. Additionally, the print area can be quite bright, thereby enhancing
visibility of the color change, particularly
in dark ambient environments. Piezoluminescent or/and piezochromic luminescent
material in the VC region
preferably provides light emission that produces the temporary color change.
[0029] Rather than have the print area change color directly in response to
the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a tenth facet of the invention
provides a Cl impact signal if the
threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected
location for the print area and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the
- 7 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily
emitting light suitable for forming color
different from the principal color such that the ID portion temporarily
appears as changed color.
[0030] The VC region in an eleventh facet of the invention contains
multiple VC cells arranged laterally in a
layer, each cell extending to a corresponding part of the surface zone. The
cells normally appear along their
parts of the surface zone as the principal color. Each cell that meets
threshold impact criteria in response to the
object impacting the surface zone at the OC area, whose shape is capable of
being arbitrary, temporarily
becomes a criteria-meeting ("CM") cell that temporarily appears along its part
of the surface zone as the
changed color.
[0031] The cell architecture is highly advantageous. The boundary of the
print area defined by the cell
surface parts is clear. The color changes along the surface part of each CM
cell without the color changing
along the surface part of any neighboring cell not intended to undergo color
change. The ambit of materials
suitable for implementing the 01 structure is increased because there is no
need to limit the VC region to
materials for which the effect of the impact does not laterally spread
significantly beyond the OC area.
Essentially any desired print accuracy can be achieved by adjusting the cell
density. If the threshold impact
criteria are to vary along the surface zone, neighboring cells can readily be
provided with different threshold
impact criteria.
[0032] Each cell preferably includes an IS part and a CC part. The IS part
of each CM cell responds to the
impact by providing a cellular impact effect. The CC part of each CM cell
responds to its impact effect by
causing that cell to temporarily appear along its part of the surface zone as
the changed color. Use of separate
IS and CC parts in each cell provides many benefits. More materials are
capable of separately performing the
impact-sensing and color-changing operations than of jointly performing them.
The ambit of colors for
implementing the principal and changed colors is increased. The two colors can
be created in different shades
by varying the reflection characteristics of the IS parts, usually largely
transparent, without changing the CC
parts. The ruggedness for withstanding object impacts is enhanced thereby
enabling the lifetime to be
increased. The ability to select and control the CC timing is improved.
[0033] Instead of having cells that meet the threshold impact criteria
change color directly in response to
the impact, each cell meeting the threshold impact criteria in response to the
impact in a twelfth facet of the
invention temporarily become a threshold CM cell that provides a Cl impact
signal identifying cellular
supplemental impact information of the object impacting the OC area as
experienced at that threshold CM cell.
Responsive to the Cl impact signal of each threshold CM cell, a CC controller
combines the cellular
supplemental information of that threshold CM cell with the cellular
supplemental information of any other
threshold CM cell to form general supplemental impact information. The CC
controller then determines whether
the general supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact
criteria, and, if so, provides a cellular
- 8 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
CC initiation signal to each threshold CM cell for causing it to become a full
CM cell and temporarily appear as
the changed color.
[0034] With the ID portion subsequently returning to appearing as the
principal color, the CC duration of
the ID portion temporarily appearing as the changed color is, in the absence
of externally caused adjustment,
substantially in a CC time duration range established prior to the impact. In
a thirteenth facet of the invention, a
CC controller responds to the impact and to subsequent instruction by
controlling the ID portion for adjusting the
CC duration subsequent to the impact. The instruction for controlling the CC
duration can be manually provided,
directly or remotely, to the controller. The CC-control instruction can also
be provided, directly or remotely, by
human voice to the controller.
[0035] The ID portion in a fourteenth facet of the invention responds to
the object impacting the surface
zone at the OC area by providing a Cl impact signal if the impact meets the
threshold impact criteria without
necessarily being subject to any of the particular limitations of the
preceding second, fifth, seventh, and tenth
facets of the invention and the later sixteenth, twentieth, twenty-second,
twenty-fourth, twenty-seventh, twenty-
eighth, thirtieth, thirty-second, thirty-fourth; thirty-sixth; thirty-eighth,
fortieth, and forty-third facets of the
invention. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location for an ID
print area in the surface zone and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily
appearing along the print area as the
changed color. The supplemental impact criteria enable the IP structure to
largely avoid providing color change
at the locations of impacts of bodies for which color change is not desired.
[0036] The supplemental impact information and criteria can be implemented
various ways. For instance,
the supplemental impact criteria can include size and/or shape criteria for
the print area. The size criteria
preferably include a maximum reference area value for the print area. The
controller then provides the ID
portion with the CC initiation signal substantially only when the print area
is expected to be of an area less than
or equal to the maximum reference area value. The size criteria can include a
minimum reference area value for
the print area if it is located substantially fully in the surface zone. If
so, the controller provides the ID portion
with the initiation signal when the print area is expected to be of an area
greater than or equal to the minimum
reference area value provided that the print area is expected to be located
substantially fully in the surface zone.
[0037] The shape criteria can include (a) a reference shape for the print
area and (b) a shape parameter
set consisting of at least one shape parameter defining variations from the
reference shape. In this case, the
controller provides the ID portion with the CC initiation signal substantially
only when the print area has a shape
expected to fall within the shape parameter set. The supplemental impact
information can include the duration
of the object in contact with the OC area. The supplemental impact criteria
then include OC duration criteria,
e.g., a maximum reference duration value. The controller provides the ID
portion with the initiation signal only
- 9 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
when the duration of the object in contact with the OC area is less than or
equal to the maximum reference OC
duration value.
[0038] An image-generating ("IC') controller responds to the impact in a
fifteenth facet of the invention by
causing an 1G structure to generate a principal print-area vicinity ("PAV")
image of the print area and adjacent
surface extending to at least a selected location of the exposed surface if
the impact meets the threshold impact
criteria. The PAV image helps determine how close the impact occurred to the
selected surface location. The
PAV image is preferably automatically generated whenever a point in the print
area is less than or equal to a
selected distance away from (including being in) the selected surface
location. The IC controller also preferably
responds to external instruction for causing the IC structure to generate the
PAV image if the threshold impact
criteria are met.
[0039] The boundary of the surface zone and the perimeter of the print area
commonly have irregularities
that make it difficult to determine how close the print area comes to the
surface-zone boundary. These
difficulties are overcome with an image-smoothening capability that removes
these irregularities in a PAV image
and thereby assists in determining how close the print area conies to the
surface-zone boundary. In particular,
the IP structure provides an approximation capability for (a) determining a
portion of the surface-zone boundary
where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at feast that
boundary portion as a smooth
boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a
portion nearest the boundary, as a
smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to
determine if they meet or overlap, and (e)
providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.
[0040] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to
the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a sixteenth facet of the
invention provides a CI impact signal if the
threshold impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected
location for the print area and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
generates a CC initiation signal.
The VC region responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by causing the
ID portion to temporarily appear as
the changed color.
[0041] In seventeenth, eighteenth, and nineteenth facets of the invention,
an object-tracking COT") control
apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed surface. As the
object impacts the surface zone at
the OC area, the ID portion temporarily appears along the print area of the
zone as the changed color if the
impact meets the threshold impact criteria and if the tracking indicates that
the object is highly likely to impact
the OC area. Impacts of bodies not tracked by the OT control apparatus
substantially do not cause color
change. Color change thus occurs largely only for suitable impacts of the
tracked object.
[0042] The VC region in the invention's seventeenth facet is capable of
being enabled for, and is ordinarily
disabled from being capable of, changing color. The OT control apparatus
estimates where the object is
- 10 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934
expected to contact the surface according to the tracking and provides a CC
enable signal shortly before the
impact occurs if the tracking indicates that the object is expected to contact
the surface zone. The CC enable
signal at least partially identifies the estimated OC area in the surface
zone. Responsive to the enable signal,
an oversize portion of the VC region extending to an oversize area of the
surface zone is temporarily enabled to
be capable of changing color. The oversize area encompasses and extends beyond
the estimated OC area.
The ID portion, now temporarily enabled to be capable of changing color due
because it is included in the
oversize portion of the VC region, responds to the impact by temporarily
appearing as the changed color if the
threshold impact criteria are met.
[0043] In the invention's eighteenth facet, the OT control apparatus
provides a CC control signal during at
least part of a CC initiation time period extending from when the object
impacts the surface zone to when the
object subsequently leaves the zone according to the tracking. The ID portion
responds to the control signal and
to the impact by temporarily appearing as the changed color if the threshold
impact criteria are met.
[0044] The ID portion in the invention's nineteenth facet responds to the
object impacting the OC area by
providing a location-identifying ("LI") impact signal if the threshold impact
criteria are met. The LI impact signal
identifies an expected location of the print area in the surface zone. The OT
control apparatus estimates where
the object contacted the exposed surface according to the tracking, provides
an estimation impact signal
indicative of estimated OC area in the surface zone if the estimated contact
is at least partially in the surface
zone, compares the LI and estimation impact signals, and provides a CC
initiation signal if the comparison
indicates that the estimated OC area and the print area at least partially
overlap. The ID portion responds to the
initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing as the changed color.
[0045] The print area satisfies, in a twentieth facet of the invention, one
of a plurality of mutually exclusive
criteria for the location of the print area in the surface zone. The location
criteria encompass the entire surface
zone and respectively correspond to a like plurality of specific changed
colors materially different from the
principal color. Two or more of the specific changed colors differ from one
another.
[0046] Responsive to an LI impact signal provided by the ID portion if the
impact meets the threshold
impact criteria, a CC controller determines which location criterion is
satisfied by the print area and then provides
a CC initiation signal at a corresponding condition. The LI impact signal can
be replaced with a Cl impact signal
that also identifies supplemental impact information. In that case, the
controller further determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
provides the initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily
appearing along the print area largely
as the specific changed color for the location criterion met by the print
area. The invention thereby enables the
ID portion to appear along the print area as one of two or more colors
depending on where the impact occurs.
[0047] The changed color is a generic changed color in a twenty-first facet
of the invention where the
threshold impact criteria are formed with multiple sets of different threshold
impact criteria respectively
-11-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/U S2017/(157934
associated with multiple specific changed colors materially different from the
principal color. The impact of the
object on the surface zone is potentially capable of meeting any of the
criteria sets. If the object impact meets
the threshold impact criteria, the generic changed color is the specific
changed color for the criteria set actually
met by the impact.
[0048] Instead of having the ID portion change color directly in response
to the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the VC region in a twenty-second facet of the
invention provides a CI impact signal if
the threshold impact criteria are met. The CI impact signal identifies an
expected location for the print area and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CO
controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily
appearing as the generic changed
color. The supplemental impact criteria consist of multiple sets of different
supplemental impact criteria
respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors materially
different from the principal color. The
supplemental impact information is potentially capable of meeting any of the
supplemental criteria sets. If the
supplemental impact information meets the supplemental impact criteria, the
generic changed color is the
specific changed color for the criteria set actually met by the supplemental
impact information.
[0049] Use of threshold and supplemental impact criteria sets provides a
capability to distinguish between
different types of object impacts. For example, if the maximum excess surface
pressure usually exerted by one
implementation of the object on the surface zone exceeds the minimum excess
surface pressure usually exerted
by another implementation of the object on the surface zone, suitable choice
of the threshold impact criteria sets
enables the IP structure to distinguish between impacts of the two object
implementations. Similarly, if one
implementation of the object is shaped considerably differently than another
implementation of the object or
usually contacts the surface zone for a considerably different time duration
than the other object implementation,
suitable choice of the supplemental impact criteria sets enables the IP
structure to distinguish between the two
object implementations as they contact the surface zone.
[0050] In a twenty-third facet of the invention, sound-generating apparatus
selectively generates a
specified audible sound in response to the object impacting the OC area so as
to meet the threshold impact
criteria. The specified sound is separate from any audible sound originating
at the OC area due physically to
(sound waves caused by) the impact. The VC region usually provides an impact
signal in response to the
impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria. The sound-generating
apparatus then generates the specified
sound in response to the impact signal.
[0051] Rather than have the ID portion change color directly in response to
the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the ID portion in a twenty-fourth facet of the
invention provides a CI impact signal if the
threshold impact criteria are met. The CI impact signal identifies an expected
location for the print area and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the
- 12 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
generates a specified audible
sound and provides a CC initiation signal. The ID portion responds to the
initiation signal by temporarily
appearing as the changed color.
[0052] The principal and changed colors are chosen to accommodate persons
having color vision
deficiency, commonly termed color blindness, in twenty-fifth and twenty-sixth
facets of the invention. In the
invention's twenty-fifth facet, the principal and changed colors differ
materially as viewed by persons having the
most common color vision deficiencies of dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy.
Dichromacy, divided into
protanopia, deuteranopia, and tritanopia, occurs when a human eye lacks one of
the three types of cone
pigments. Anomalous trichromacy, divided into protanomaly, deuteranomaly, and
tritanomaly, occurs when one
of the eye's three cone pigments is altered in spectral sensitivity.
[0053] In the invention's twenty-sixth facet, a selected one of the
principal and changed colors is restricted
from being any color from green to red in the visible light spectrum or any
color having a non-insignificant
component of any color from green to red in the light spectrum in order to
accommodate persons having the
predominant red-green color vision deficiencies, namely protanopia,
deuteranopia, protanamaly, and
deuteranomaly. The remaining one of the principal and changed colors is
preferably restricted from being any
color from violet to yellow in the visible light spectrum or any color having
a non-insignificant component of any
color from violet to yellow in the light spectrum in order to also accommodate
persons having the lesser common
blue-yellow color vision deficiencies of tritanomaly and tritanopia.
[0054] Instead of having the print area change color directly in response
to the impact if it meets the
threshold impact criteria, the VC region in twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth
facets of the invention provides a CI
impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are met The CI impact signal
identifies an expected location for the
print area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact
signal, a CC controller determines
whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria
and, if so, provides a CC
initiation signal. The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by
temporarily appearing as the changed color.
In the invention's twenty-seventh facet, the principal and changed colors
differ materially as viewed by persons
having dichromacy and anomalous trichromacy. In the invention's twenty-eighth
facet, a selected one of the
principal and changed colors is restricted from being any color from green to
red in the visible light spectrum or
any color having a non-insignificant component of any color from green to red
in the visible light spectrum.
[0055] The activity in the preceding twenty-eight facets of the invention
can be tennis in which the object is
a tennis ball. If so, the 01 structure is incorporated into a tennis court for
which the exposed surface has two
baselines, two sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged
conventionally. Each baseline, the
sidelines, and the serviceline nearest that baseline define a backcourt so as
to establish two backcourts. The
present CC capability can be incorporated into various parts of the tennis
court For instance, the surface zone
can be constituted with two VC backcourt area portions which partly occupy the
backcourts and respectively
- 13 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
adjoin the servicelines along largely their entire lengths. The CC capability
then helps determine whether served
tennis balls are "in" or "our.
[0056] The CC capability in the invention's preceding twenty-eight facets
enables a viewer to readily
visually determine where the object impacted the exposed surface. The accuracy
in determining the location of
the print area is very high. A tennis player playing on a tennis court having
the CC capability can, in the vast
majority of instances, visually see whether a tennis ball impacting the court
near a tennis line is "in" or "out".
Both the need to use challenges for reviewing line calls and the delay for
line-call review are greatly reduced.
The CC capability can be used in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball,
football, and baseball/softball. While
often a ball, the object can be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a
person. The CC capability can
also be used in activities other than sports.
[0057] In twenty-ninth and thirtieth facets of the invention directed
specifically to tennis, suitable impact of
an object, typically a tennis ball, on an exposed surface of an 01 structure
used in playing tennis causes the
surface to temporarily change color largely at the impact area. The exposed
surface consists of an in-bounds
("IB") playing area and a surrounding out-of-bounds ("OB") playing area. The
IB area has two baselines, two
(singles) sidelines, two servicelines, and a centerline arranged
conventionally. A tennis net is situated above an
imaginary or real net line located midway between the baselines. A backcourt
is defined by each baseline, the
sidelines, and the serviceline closest to that baseline so as to establish two
backcourts. Four servicecourts are
defined by the sidelines, the servicelines, the centerline, and the net line.
[0058] The 01 structure contains (a) two VC line-adjoining ("LA") backcourt
("BC") structure portions
extending to the exposed surface at two LA BC area portions partly occupying
the backcourts and respectively
adjoining the servicelines, (b) four VC servicecourt ("SC") structure portions
extending to the exposed surface
respectively at four LA SC area portions partly occupying the servicecourts
and adjoining the centerline, and/or
(c) two VC OB structure portions extending to the exposed surface at two LA OB
area portions partly occupying
the OB area on opposite sides of the net line and respectively adjoining the
baselines. Each LA BC structure
portion, if present, normally appears along its LA BC area portion as a
principal BC color. Each LA SC structure
portion, if present, normally appears along its LA SC area portion as a
principal SC color. Each LA OB structure
portion, if present, normally appears along its LA OB area portion as a
principal OB color.
[0059] Each LA structure portion in the 01 structure of the invention's
twenty-ninth facet includes an IS
component and a CC component. An ID segment of the IS component responds to
the object impacting the LA
area portion of that LA structure portion at an ID OC area by providing an
impact effect if the impact meets
threshold impact criteria. An ID segment of the CC component responds to the
impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure portion to temporarily appear along an ID print
area of that LA area portion as
changed color materially different from the principal color of that LA
structure portion. The print area of each LA
area portion closely matches its OC area. When the object is a tennis ball,
the color change at each print area
-14-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
enables viewers, such as the tennis players and any official(s), to readily
visually determine where the tennis ball
impacted the exposed surface and thus to determine rapidly whether the ball
impacted "in" or "out". Use of
separate IS and CC components in each LA structure portion in the 01 structure
provides the benefits for the
invention's first facet
[0060] Rather than have each LA structure portion in the 01 structure
change color directly in response to
the impact if it meets the threshold impact criteria, the ID portion of that
structure portion in the invention's
thirtieth facet provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria
are met. The Cl impact signal identifies
an expected location for the print area of that structure portion and
supplemental impact information,
Responsive to the impact signal, a CC controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets
supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides a CC initiation signal. The
ID portion of that structure portion
responds to its initiation signal, if provided, by temporarily appearing along
its print area as its changed color.
[0061] The supplemental impact criteria are preferably characteristic of a
tennis ball impacting the
exposed surface. For instance, the supplemental impact criteria can include
size and/or shape criteria for each
print area as impacted by a tennis ball. Alternatively or additionally, the
supplemental impact information can
include time duration of the object in contact with each OC area. The
supplemental impact criteria then include
OC duration criteria for a tennis ball impacting each VC area portion. Use of
supplemental impact criteria
characteristic of a tennis ball impacting the exposed surface enables the P
structure to distinguish between
impacts of tennis balls and impacts of other bodies, such the shoes of the
tennis players, and thus to provide
color change substantially only for tennis ball impacts.
[0062] In thirty-first, thirty-second, thirty-third, and thirty-fourth
facets of the invention, suitable impact of an
object on an exposed surface of an 01 structure of a sports-playing structure
causes the exposed surface to
temporarily change color largely at the impact area. The object can be a
sports instrument or a person including
any clothing worn by the person. The exposed surface consists of (a) an 1B
area defined by a closed boundary
and (b) a surrounding OB area. A closed boundary line extends along the closed
boundary and has opposite
inside and outside edges, one of which is situated in one of the 1B and OB
areas and the other of which meets
the other of the IB and OB areas.
[0063] The 01 structure in the invention's thirty-first and thirty-second
facets contains VC inside-edge
boundary-vicinity ("By") LA structure extending to the surface at inside-edge
LA area situated in the 18 area and
adjoining the inside edge of the boundary line at least partly along its
length or/and (b) VC outside-edge BV LA
structure extending to the surface at outside-edge LA area situated in the OB
area and adjoining the outside
edge of the boundary line at least partly along its length. Each BV LA
structure normally appears along its LA
area as a normal-state BV LA color if that LA structure is present in the 01
structure. The inside-edge LA
structure is present if the boundary line, including its outside edge, is in
the OB area. Similarly, the outside-edge
LA structure is present if the boundary line, including its inside edge, is in
the 1B area.
- 15 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[0064] Each BV LA structure in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-
first facet includes IS and CC
components. An ID segment of the IS component responds to the object impacting
the LA area of that LA
structure at an ID OC area by providing an impact effect if the impact meets
threshold impact criteria. An ID
segment of the CC component responds to the impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure to
temporarily appear along an ID print area of that LA area as changed-state BV
LA color materially different from
the normal-state LA color of that LA structure. Use of separate IS and CC
components provides the above-
described benefits.
[0065] The ID portion of each BV LA structure in the 01 structure of the
invention's thirty-second facet
responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC
area by providing a Cl impact signal
if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. The Cl impact signal identifies
an expected location of an ID print
area in that LA area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the
impact signal, a CC controller
determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental
impact criteria and, if so, provides
a CC initiation signal. The ID portion of each LA structure responds to its
initiation signal, if provided, by
temporarily appearing along its print area as its changed-state BV LA color.
[0066] In the invention's thirty-third and thirty-fourth facets, the IB
area has at least one finite-width internal
line having a pair of opposite edges. The 01 structure contains, for each
internal line, VC internal LA structure
extending to the surface at LA area adjoining a selected one of the edges of
that internal line at least partly
along its length. Each internal LA structure normally appears along its LA
area as a normal-state internal LA
color if that LA structure is in the 01 structure. Each internal LA structure
in the 01 structure of the invention's
thirty-third facet includes IS and CC components. An ID segment of the IS
component responds to the object
impacting the LA area of that LA structure at an ID OC area by providing an
impact effect if the impact meets
threshold impact criteria. An ID segment of the CC component responds to the
impact effect by causing an ID
portion of that LA structure to temporarily appear along an ID print area of
that LA area as changed-state internal
LA color materially different from the normal-state LA color of that LA
structure,
[0067] The ID portion of each internal LA structure in the 01 structure of
the invention's thirty-fourth facet
responds to the object impacting the LA area of that LA structure at the OC
area by providing a CI impact signal
if the impact meets threshold impact criteria. The CI impact signal identifies
an expected location of an ID print
area in that LA area and supplemental impact information. Responsive to the
impact signal, a CC controller
determines whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental
impact criteria and, if so, provides
a CC initiation signal. The ID portion of each LA structure responds to its
initiation signal by temporarily
appearing along its print area as its changed-state internal LA color. Upon
implementing the supplemental
impact criteria as characteristic of a person's shoe impacting the exposed
surface, this inventive aspect serves
to help determine whether shots taken near the three-point lines in basketball
qualify for three points and
whether violations of the attack lines occur in volleyball.
- 16 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[0068] Suitable impact of an object on an exposed surface of an 01
structure used in playing football for
thirty-fifth and thirty-sixth facets of the invention and baseball or softball
for thirty-seventh and thirty-eighth facets
of the invention causes the exposed surface to temporarily change color
largely at the impact area. In football,
the object is football or a person including any clothing, e.g., shoe, worn by
the person. The exposed surface for
football consists of an IB area and an OB area having two end lines and two
side lines extending between the
end lines to define the IB area. Each end or side line is an open boundary
line having inside and outside edges
respectively meeting the 1B area and situated in the OB area.
[0069] The football 01 structure includes (a) two VC inside-edge end-line-
adjoining ("ELA") structure parts
extending to the surface at two inside-edge ELA area parts in the IB area so
as to adjoin the inside edges of the
end lines, (b) two VC inside-edge side-line-adjoining ("SLA") structure parts
extending to the surface at two
inside-edge SLA area parts in the IB area so as to adjoin the inside edges of
the side lines, (c) two VC end-line
structure parts extending to the surface at the end lines, and/or (d) two VC
side-line structure parts extending to
the surface at the side lines. Each ELA or SLA structure part, if present, is
a VC LA structure part normally
appearing along its LA area part as a principal ("PP") color. Each end-line or
side-line structure part, if present,
is a VC line structure part normally appearing along its open boundary line as
an additional ("AD") color. Each
boundary and the adjoining LA area part, if present, are usually situated on
hard material of a path.
[0070] An ID portion of each LA or line structure part in the 01 structure
of the invention's thirty-fifth facet
responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure part at an ID
OC area by temporarily appearing
along a closely matching ID print area of that area part as changed or altered
color materially different from that
structure parts PP or AD color if the impact meets threshold impact criteria.
The ID portion of each LA or line
structure part in the 01 structure of the invention's thirty-sixth facet
provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold
impact criteria are met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected location
of the print area and supplemental
information for the impact. A CC controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets
supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the ID portion of that LA or
line structure part with a CC initiation
signal that causes that ID portion to temporarily appear along its print area
as its changed or altered color.
[0071] In baseball or softball, the object is a baseball or softball. The
exposed surface consists of (a) a fair
area defined by an outfield barrier and two perpendicular foul lines having
parts that extend up the barrier, (b)
the inside area of the barrier, and (c) a foul area adjoining the fair area
along the foul lines. The fair area
consists of a general infield area and a general outfield area both of which
include parts of each foul line. The
foul area includes (a) two foul-territory ("ELT) dirt area sections extending
from home plate along the foul lines
beyond their bases partway to the barrier and (b) two FLT grass area sections
extending from the FLT dirt area
sections along the foul lines at least partway to the barrier. A main outfield
foul-line part of each foul line
extends from the dirt infield area at least partway to the barrier.
- 17 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[0072] The baseball/softball 01 structure includes (a) two VC main outfield-
adjoining FLT LA structure
parts extending to the surface at two main outfield-adjoining FLT LA area
parts adjoining the main outfield foul-
line parts and/or (b) two VC main outfield foul-line structure parts extending
to the surface at the main outfield
foul-line parts. Each main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure part, if
present, normally appears along its LA
area part as a PP outfield color. Each main outfield foul-line structure part,
if present, normally appears along its
foul-line part as an AD outfield color. Two channels usually extend down to
hard material in grass along the foul
lines. When the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA structure parts are present,
the channels extend respectively
into the FLT grass area sections so that the main outfield-adjoining FLT LA
area parts are situated along the
hard material.
[0073] An ID portion of each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the 01
structure of the invention's thirty-
seventh facet responds to the object impacting the area part of that structure
part at an ID 00 area by
temporarily appearing along a closely matching ID print area of that area part
as changed or aitered outfield
color materially different from that structure part's PP or AD outfield color
if the impact meets threshold impact
criteria. The ID portion of each FLT LA or foul-line structure part in the 01
structure of the invention's thirty-
eighth facet provides a Cl impact signal if the threshold impact criteria are
met. The Cl impact signal identifies
an expected location of the print area and supplemental information for the
impact. A CC controller determines
whether the supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria
and, if so, provides the ID
portion of that FLT LA or foul-line structure part with a CC initiation signal
that causes its ID portion to
temporarily appear along its print area as its changed or altered outfield
color. Impacts on and near the
remaining parts of the foul lines beyond their bases, including the barrier
parts, are preferably handled in the
same way as the main outfield foul-line parts.
[0074] The 01 structure in thirty-ninth and fortieth facets of the
invention contains a principal VC region and
a secondary region extending to the exposed surface respectively at adjoining
principal and secondary surface
zones. The principal region has the characteristics described above. The
secondary region fixedly appears
along the secondary surface zone as a secondary color. Hence, impact of the
object on the secondary zone
does not cause it to significantly change color at the impact area of the
secondary zone. The object is spherical
here.
[0075] After impacting either surface zone, the object rebounds from that
zone. The object impacts each
surface zone with an incident linear vector velocity and an incident angular
vector velocity and rebounds from
each zone with a rebound linear vector velocity and a rebound angular vector
velocity. Each surface zone has a
coefficient of orthogonal velocity restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound
orthogonal velocity component to negative
incident orthogonal velocity component, and a ratio of tangential velocity
restitution, i.e., the ratio of rebound
tangential velocity component to incident tangential velocity component, for
the object impacting that zone.
- 18 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
[0076] Restitution matching is provided across the two surface zones.
Specifically, the coefficients of
orthogonal velocity restitution for the two zones differ by no more than 15%
for the object separately impacting
the zones at largely identical impact conditions of incident linear and
angular vector velocity. Alternatively or
additionally, the ratios of tangential velocity restitution for the two zones
differ by no more than 5% for the object
separately impacting the zones at largely identical impact conditions of
incident linear and angular vector
velocity at a reference incident angle of 16 to the exposed surface at each
location where the object impacts
the exposed surface.
[0077] The restitution matching enables the rebound characteristics of the
object to be largely independent
of whether it contacts the principal or secondary surface zone. This is
particularly desirable in sports such as
tennis where the object is a tennis ball. The combination of the present CC
capability and the restitution
matching can be provided at various parts of the tennis court. For example,
the principal and secondary surface
zones can respectively be (a) two elongated VC area portions partly occupying
the backcourts and respectively
adjoining the servicelines along largely their entire lengths and (a) two
fixed-color ("FC") area portions partly
occupying the backcourts and respectively adjoining the VC area portions along
largely their entire lengths. The
CC capability is used in determining whether served tennis balls are "in" or
"out" while the restitution matching
desirably enables the object rebound characteristics to be quite similar for
the VC and FC area portions.
[0078] The ID portion here is an ID portion of the principal region. In the
invention's thirty-ninth facet, the
ID portion responds to the object impacting the principal zone at the OC area
by temporarily appearing along the
print area as the changed color if the impact meets the threshold impact
criteria. Instead of this, the principal
region in the invention's fortieth facet externally provides a Cl impact
signal if the impact causes the threshold
impact criteria to be met. The Cl impact signal identifies an expected
location for the print area and
supplemental impact information. Responsive to the impact signal, a CC
controller determines whether the
supplemental impact information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so,
provides a CC initiation signal.
The ID portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as
the changed color.
[0079] In a forty-first facet of the invention, OT apparatus tracks
movement of the object over the exposed
surface and provides an image-causing tracking impact signal when the object
impacts the surface zone
according to the tracking. An IG system responds to at least the tracking
impact signal by generating a PAV
image comprising an image of the print area and adjacent area of the exposed
surface. The IG system typically
generates the PAV image in substantially sole response to the impact signal.
Alternatively, the 1G system
generates the PAV image in joint response to the impact signal and instruction
to generate the PAV image. In
either case, a visible record of the print area is generated.
[0080] The boundary of the surface zone and the perimeter of the print area
commonly have irregularities
that make it difficult to determine how close the print area comes to the
surface-zone boundary. These
difficulties are overcome with an image-smoothening capability that removes
these irregularities in the PAV
- 19 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
image and thereby assists in determining how close the print area comes to the
surface-zone boundary. In
particular, the image-smoothening capability entails (a) determining a portion
of the surface-zone boundary
where the print area is nearest the boundary, (b) approximating at least that
boundary portion as a smooth
boundary vicinity curve, (c) approximating the print area perimeter, or a
portion nearest the boundary, as a
smooth perimeter vicinity curve, (d) comparing the vicinity curves to
determine if they meet or overlap, and (e)
providing an indication, e.g., an image, of the comparison.
[0081] The VC region in a forty-second facet of the invention responds to
the object impacting the surface
zone at the OC area by providing an LI impact signal if the impact meets the
threshold impact criteria. The LI
impact signal identifies an ID threshold CM area where the impact meets the
threshold impact criteria in the
surface zone. The threshold CM area is usually smaller than the OC area
because the impact meets the
threshold impact criteria across only part, usually an internal part, of the
OC area.
[0082] Responsive to the LI impact signal, if provided, a CC controller
provides a CC initiation signal which
designates a print area in the surface zone such that the print area is larger
than the threshold CM area and at
least partly encompasses, at least mostly outwardly conforms to, and is
concentric with the 00 area. The ID
portion responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing along the
print area as the changed color. By
operating in this manner, the controller compensates for the threshold CM area
being smaller than the OC area
so that the print area can closely match the OC area in size, shape, and
location.
[0083] A technique is preferably employed for distinguishing between
impacts for which color change is
desired and impacts, e.g., of bodies other than the object, for which color
change is not desired. In one version
of the technique according to a forty-third facet of the invention, the VC
region provides a CI impact signal if the
impact meets the threshold impact criteria instead of providing the LI signal
if the threshold impact criteria are
met. The CI impact signal identifies an expected location for the CM area and
supplemental impact information.
Responsive to the Cl impact signal, if provided, the CC controller determines
whether the supplemental impact
information meets supplemental impact criteria and, if so, provides the CC
initiation signal. The ID portion
responds to the initiation signal by temporarily appearing as the changed
color.
[0084] In another version of the impact-distinguishing technique according
to a forty-fourth facet of the
invention, OT control apparatus tracks movement of the object over the exposed
surface. The CC controller
responds to at least the LI impact signal, if provided, by providing the
initiation signal to which the ID portion
responds by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color if
the tracked movement indicates
that the object is expected to impact the 00 area. Alternatively, the CC
controller responds to at least the LI
impact signal, if provided, by providing the initiation signal if the tracking
indicates that the object impacted, or is
expected to impact, the OC area. The ID portion of the VC region then responds
to the initiation signal, if
provided, by temporarily appearing along the print area as the changed color.
In either case, a body impacting
- 20 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
the surface zone but not being so tracked does not cause a color change at the
body's impact site on the
surface zone.
[0085] As with the first twenty-eight facets of the invention, the CC
capability in the last six facets of the
invention enables a viewer to readily visually determine where the object
impacted the exposed surface. The
accuracy in determining the print-area location is again very high. A tennis
player playing on a tennis court
provided with the CC capability can, in the vast majority of instances,
visually see whether a tennis ball
impacting the court near a tennis line is "in" or "out". The need to use
challenges for reviewing fine calls and the
delay for such review are greatly reduced, The CC capability of the
invention's last six facets can be employed
in other sports, e.g., basketball, volleyball, football, and
baseball/softball. Although often a ball, the object can
be implemented in other form such as a shoe of a person. The CC capability can
again be used in activities
other than sports. In short, the invention provides a very large advance over
the prior art.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0086] Figs. 1 and 2 are layout view of a standard tennis court with
examples of areas where tennis balls
contact the court's playing surface near the tennis lines indicated in Fig. 2.
[0087] Figs. 3 and 4 are schematic diagrams of simulations of a tennis ball
impacting a tennis court as
determined by the Hawk-Eye system.
[0088] Figs. 5a - 5c are layout views of an object-impact ("01") structure
of an information-presentation
("IP") structure embodiable or/and extendable according to the invention, the
01 structure having a surface for
being impacted by an object at an impact-dependent ("ID") area and for
changing color along a corresponding
print area of a variable-color ("VC") region. The cross section of each of
Figs. 6a, 11 a, 12a, 13a, 14a, 15a, 16a,
17a, 18a, and 19a described below is taken through plane al-al in Fig. 5a. The
cross section of each of Figs.
6b, 11b, 12b, 13b, 14b, 15b, 16b, 17b, 18b, and 19b described below is taken
through plane b1-b1 in Fig. 5b.
The cross section of each of Figs. 6c, 11c, 12c, 13c, 14c, 15c, 16c, 17c, 18c,
and 19c described below is taken
through plane c1-cl in Fig. 5c.
[0089] Figs. 6a - 6c are cross-sectional side views of an embodiment of the
01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c.
[0090] Figs. 7 - 9 are graphs of spectral radiosity as a function of
wavelength.
[0091] Fig. 10 is a graph of a radiosity parameter as a function of time.
[0092] Figs. 11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a - 15c, 16a -
16c, 17a - 17c, 18a - 18c, and 19a
- 19c are cross-sectional side views of nine respective further embodiments of
the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c
according to the invention.
- 21 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
[0093] Figs. 20a and 20b and 21a and 21b are respective cross-sectional
side views of two variations of
the 01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c according to the invention. The cross
sections of Figs. 20a and 20b are
respectively taken through planes a1-a1 and 131-101 in Figs. 5a and 5b subject
to deletion of the fixed-color
region in the 01 structure of Figs. 5a and 5b. The same applies to Figs. 21a
and 21b.
[0094] Figs. 22a and 22b are additional layout views of the 01 structure of
Figs. 5a - 5c for different impact
conditions than represented in Figs. 5b and 5c.
[0095] Figs. 23a and 23b are cross-sectional side views of the embodiment
of the 01 structures of Figs. 6a
- 6c for the impact conditions respectively represented in Figs. 22a and 22b.
The cross sections of Figs. 23a
and 23b are respectively taken through planes a2-a2 and b2-b2 in Figs. 22a and
22b.
[0096] Figs. 24a and 24b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of two respective
embodiments of the impact-sensitive color-change ("1SCC") structure in the 01
structure of Figs. 11a - 11c or
14a - 14c.
[0097] Figs. 25a and 25b are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of two respective
embodiments of the ISCC structure in the 01 structure of Figs. 12a - 12c, 15a -
15c, 17a - 17c, 19a - 19c, or 21a
and 21b.
[0098] Figs. 26a and 26b, 27a and 27b, 28a and 28b, 29a and 29b, 30a and
30b, and 31a and 31b are
cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light
reflection in VC regions. Figs. 26a and
26b apply to the VC region in Figs. 6a - 6c or 20a and 20b. Figs. 27a and 27b
apply to the VC region in Figs.
11a 11c. Figs. 28a and 28b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in
Figs. 12a - 12c or 21a and 21b.
Figs. 29a and 29b apply to the VC region in Figs. 13a - 13c. Figs. 30a and 30b
apply to the VC region in Figs.
14a - 14c. Figs. 31a and 31b apply to some embodiments of the VC region in
Figs. 15a - 15c.
[0099] Figs. 32a and 32b, 33a and 33b, 34a and 34b, 35a and 35b, 36a and
36b, and 37a and 37b are
cross-sectional side views showing how color changing occurs by light emission
in VC regions. Figs. 32a and
32b apply to the VC region in Figs. 6a - 6c or 20a and 20b. Figs. 33a and 33b
apply to the VC region in Figs.
11a 11c. Figs. 34a and 34b apply to the VC region in Figs. 12a - 12c or 21a
and 21b. Figs. 35a and 35b apply
to the VC region in Figs. 13a - 13c. Figs. 36a and 36b apply to the VC region
in Figs. 14a - 14c. Figs. 37a and
37b apply to the VC region in Figs. 15a - 15c.
101001 Figs. 38a and 38b are layout views of a cellular embodiment of the
01 structure of Figs. 5a - 5c
according to the invention. The cross section of each of Figs. 41a, 42a, 43a,
44a, 45a, 46a, 47a, 48a, 49a, and
50a described below is taken through plane a3-a3 in Fig. 38a. The cross
section of each of Figs. 41b, 42b, 43b,
44b, 45b, 46b, 47b, 48b, 49b, and 50b described below is taken through plane
b3-b3 in Fig. 38b.
[01011 Figs. 39a and 39b are diagrams of exemplary quantized print areas
within circular object-contact
areas for the 01 structure of Figs. 38a and 38b.
- 22 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
[0102] Fig. 40 is a graph of the ratio of the difference in area between a
true circle and a quantized circle
as a function of the ratio of the radius of the true circle to the
length/width dimension of identical squares forming
the quantized circle.
10103] Figs. 41a and 41b, 42a and 42b, 43a and 43b, 44a and 44b, 45a and
45b, 46a and 46b, 47a and
47b, 48a and 48b, 49a and 49b, and 50a and 50b are cross-sectional side views
of ten respective embodiments
of the 01 structure of Figs. 38a and 38b.
10104i Fig. 51 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the
cellular ISCC structure in the
01 structure of Figs. 41a and 41b, 44a and 44b, 47a and 47b, or 49a and 49b.
10105] Fig. 52 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the
cellular 1SCC structure in the
01 structure of Figs. 42a and 42b or 45a and 45b.
101061 Fig. 53 is an expanded cross-sectional view of an embodiment of the
cellular 1SCC structure in the
01 structure of Figs. 43a and 43b or 46a and 46b.
101071 Figs. 54a and 54b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01
structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a
corresponding print area of a VC region under control of a duration controller
for adjusting color-change ("CC")
duration according to the invention.
101081 Figs. 55 - 58 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of four respective
embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 54a and 54b according to the
invention. The cross section of the layout
portion of each of Figs. 55 - 58 is taken through plane b4-b4 in Fig. 54b.
101091 Figs. 59a and 59b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01
structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a
corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of a duration
controller for extending CC duration
according to the invention.
10110i Figs. 60 - 63 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of four respective
embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 59a and 59b according to the
invention. The cross section of the layout
portion of each of Figs. 60 - 63 is taken through plane b5-b5 in Fig. 59b.
[01111 Figs. 64a and 64b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01
structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a
corresponding print area of a VC region under control of an intelligent
controller according to the invention.
]0112i Figs. 65 - 68 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of four respective
embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 64a and 64b according to the
invention. The cross section of the layout
portion of each of Figs. 65 - 68 is taken through plane b6-b6 in Fig. 64b.
- 23 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
10113] Figs. 69a and 69b are composite block diagrams/layout views of an IF
structure containing an 01
structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a
corresponding print area of a cellular VC region under control of an
intelligent controller according to the
invention.
[0114( Figs. 70 - 73 are composite block diagrams/side cross-sectional
views of four respective
embodiments of the IF structure of Figs. 69a and 69b according to the
invention. The cross section of the layout
portion of each of Figs. 70 - 73 is taken through plane b7-b7 in Fig. 69b.
(01151 Figs. 74 - 77 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-
sectional views of four respective IP
structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being
impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region and also
having an image-generating
capability according to the invention,
101161 Figs. 78a and 78b are layout views of an 01 structure having a
surface for being impacted by an
object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area
of one or both of two adjoining VC
regions according to the invention.
10117] Figs. 79a and 79b are layout views of an 01 structure having a
surface for being impacted by an
object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area
of one or more of three
consecutively adjoining VC regions according to the invention. The cross
section of each of Figs. 80a, 81a, 82a,
83a, 84a, and 85a described below is taken through plane a8-a8 in Fig. 79a.
The cross section of each of Figs.
80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b described below is taken through plane b8-b8
in Fig. 79b. Label a8* in each
of Figs. 80a, 81a, 82a, 83a, 84a, and 85a indicates the location of a cross
section taken through plane a8*-a8* in
Fig. 78a. Label b8* in each of Figs. 80b, 81b, 82b, 83b, 84b, and 85b
indicates the location of a cross section
taken through plane b8*-b8* in Fig. 78b.
(01181 Figs. 80a and 80b, 81a and 81b, 82a and 82b, 83a and 83b, 84a and
84b, and 85a and 85b are
cross-sectional side views of six respective embodiments of the 01 structure
of Figs. 79a and 79b.
10119] Figs. 86a and 86b are layout views of an 01 structure having a
surface for being impacted by an
object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area
of one or both of two adjoining
cellular VC regions according to the invention.
101201 Figs. 87a and 87b are layout views of an 01 structure having a
surface for being impacted by an
object at an ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area
of one or more of three
consecutively adjoining cellular VC regions according to the invention.
10121 Figs. 88 and 89 are composite block diagrams/layout views of two
respective IF structures, each
containing an 01 structure having a surface for being impacted by an object at
an ID area and for changing color
- 24 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
along a corresponding print area of one or more of three consecutively
adjoining VC regions under control of a
CC controller according to the invention.
101221 Figs. 90 - 93 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-
sectional views of four respective IF
structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for being
impacted by an object at an ID area and
for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more of three
consecutively adjoining VC regions
and having an image-generating capability according to the invention.
101231 Figs. 94a - 94d are layout views of four respective examples of the
object-contact location and
resultant print area for the object variously impacting the surface in the 01
structures of Figs. 5a and 5b, 78a and
78b, and 79a and 79b.
101241 Figs. 95a - 95d are screen views of smooth-curve approximations,
according to the invention, of the
print area and nearby surface area respectively for the examples of Figs. 94a -
94d.
101251 Figs. 96 and 97 are layout views of two respective exemplary
embodiments of an IF structure
implemented into a tennis court according to the invention.
101261 Figs. 98 - 100 are layout views of exemplary embodiments of an IP
structure respectively
implemented into a basketball court, a volleyball court, and a football field
according to the invention.
101271 Fig. 101 is a perspective view of an exemplary embodiment of an IF
structure implemented into a
baseball or softball field according to the invention.
101281 Figs. 102a and 102b are cross-sectional views of two models of a
hollow ball impacting an inclined
surface.
101291 Figs. 103 and 104 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-
sectional views of two
respective IF structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for
being impacted by an object at an
ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of a VC region
under control of an intelligent
controller according to the invention.
101301 Figs. 105 and 106 are composite block diagrams/perspective cross-
sectional views of two
respective IF structures, each containing an 01 structure having a surface for
being impacted by an object at an
ID area and for changing color along a corresponding print area of one or more
of three consecutively adjoining
VC regions under control of an intelligent controller according to the
invention.
101311 Like reference symbols are employed in the drawings and in the
description of the preferred
embodiments to represent the same, or very similar, item or items.
- 25 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
101321 Table of Contents
Preliminary Material
Basic Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region
Timing and Color-difference Parameters
Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region Formed with Impact-
sensitive
Changeably Reflective or Changeably Emissive Material
Object-impact Structure Having Separate Impact-sensitive and Color-change
Components
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Changeably
Reflective or
Changeably Emissive Color-change Component
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Color-change
Component
that Utilizes Electrode Assembly
Configuration and General Operation of Electrode Assembly
Electrode Layers and their Characteristics and Compositions
Reflection-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly
Emission-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly
Object-impact Structure Having Surface Structure for Protection, Pressure
Spreading, and/or
Velocity Restitution Matching
Object-impact Structure Having Deformation-controlled Extended Color-change
Duration
Equation-form Summary of Light Relationships
Transmissivity Specifications
Manufacture of Object-impact Structure
Object-impact Structure with Print Area at Least Partly around Unchanged Area
Configurations of Impact-sensitive Color-change Structure
Pictorial Views of Color Changing by Light Reflection and Emission
Object-impact Structure with Cellular Arrangement
Adjustment of Changed-state Duration
Intelligent Color-change Control
Image Generation and Object Tracking
Multiple Variable-color Regions
Curve Smoothening
Color Change Dependent on Location in Variable-color Region of Single Normal
Color
Sound Generation
Accommodation of Color Vision Deficiency
Tennis Implementations
- 26 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
Other Sports Implementations
Velocity Restitution Matching
Visible Print-area Record Arising Directly from Object Tracking
Intelligent Control for Closely Matching Print Area to Object-contact Area
Variations
Preliminary Material
101331 The visible light spectrum extends across a wavelength range
specified as being as narrow as 400
- 700 nm to as wide as 380 - 780 nm. Light in the visible wavelength range
produces a continuous variation in
spectral color from violet to red. A visible color is black, any spectral
color, and any color creatable from any
combination of spectral colors. For instance, visible color includes white,
gray, brown, and magenta because
each of them is creatable from spectral colors even though none of them is
itself in the visible spectrum. Further
recitations of color or light herein mean visible color or visible light.
Radiation in the ultraviolet and infrared
spectra are respectively hereafter termed ultraviolet ("UV") and infrared
("IR") radiation.
101341 Various wavelength ranges are reported for the main spectral colors.
Although indigo or/and cyan
are sometimes identified as main spectral colors, the main spectral colors are
here considered to be violet, blue,
green, yellow, orange, and red having the wavelength ranges presented in Table
1 and determined as the
averages of the ranges reported in ten references rounded off to the nearest 5
nm using the maximum specified
range of 380 - 780 nm for the visible spectrum.
Table 1
Color Wavelength Range (nm)
Violet 380 - 445
Blue 445 - 490
Green 490 - 570
Yellow 570 - 590
Orange 590 - 630
Red 630 - 780
101351 Recitations of light striking, or incident on, a surface of a body
mean that the light strikes, or is
incident on, the surface from outside the body. The color of the surface is
determined by the wavelengths of
light leaving the surface and traveling away from the body. Such light
variously consists of incident light
reflected by the body so as to leave it along the surface, light emitted by
the body so as to leave it along the
surface, and light leaving the body along the surface after entering the body
along one or more other surfaces
and passing through the body. Even if the characteristics that define the
color of the surface are fixed, its color
can differ if it is struck by light of different wavelength characteristics.
For instance, the surface appears as one
color when struck by white light but as another color when struck by non-white
light.
- 27 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[0136j If a person directly views the body, the color of the surface is
directly determined by the
wavelengths of the light traveling from the surface to the person's eye(s) and
the brain's interpretation of those
wavelengths. If an image of the surface is captured by a color camera whose
captured image is later viewed by
a person, the surface's color is initially established by the wavelengths of
the light traveling from the surface to
the camera. The surface's color as presented in the image is then determined
by the wavelengths of the light
traveling from the image to the person's eye(s) and the brain's interpretation
of those wavelengths. In either
case, the wavelengths of light leaving the surface define its color subject,
for the camera, to any color distortion
introduced by the camera.
101371 The radiosity, sometimes termed intensity, of light of a particular
color is the total power per unit
area of that light leaving a body along a surface. The spectral radiosity of
light of a particular color is the total
power per unit area per unit wavelength at each wavelength of light leaving a
body along a surface. The
spectral radiosity constituency (or spectral radiosity profile) of light of a
particular color is the variation (or
distribution) of spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength and defines
the wavelength constituency of that
light. Inasmuch as the spectral radiosity of light is zero outside the visible
spectrum, the radiosity of light of a
particular color is the integral of the spectral radiosity constituency across
the visible spectrum.
101381 Two colors differ when their spectral radiosity constituencies
differ. The spectrum-integrated
absolute spectral radiosity difference between light of two different colors
is the integral of the absolute value of
the difference between the spectral radiosities of the two colors across the
visible spectrum. For light passing
through a body, the spectral radiosity of light leaving it may differ from
that of light entering it due to phenomena
such as light absorption in the body. For instance, if light appears as a
shade of a color upon entering a body
and if the lights radiosity decreases in passing through the body, the light
appears as a lighter shade of that
color upon leaving the body. When light leaving a body along a surface of the
body has multiple reflected
components, each reflected component differs from each other reflected
component because the light reflected
by each reflected component causes its spectral radiosity constituency to
differ from the spectral radiosity
constituency of each other reflected component.
101391 The normalized spectral radiosity of light of a particular color is
its spectral radiosity divided by its
radiosity. The normalized spectral radiosity constituency of light of a
particular color is the variation of its
normalized spectral radiosity as a function of wavelength. The integral of the
normalized spectral radiosity
constituency across the visible spectrum is one. For light passing through a
body, use of the same reference
nomenclature to identity the light leaving the body as used to identify the
light entering it means that the
normalized spectral radiosity constituency remains essentially the same during
passage through the body even
though the spectral radiosity constituency may change during the passage. This
convention is used below for
light undergoing plane polarization in passing through a body.
- 28 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[01401 Rods and cones in the human eye are sensitive to incoming light.
Rods are generally sensitive to
the radiosity of the light. Cones are generally sensitive to its spectral
radiosity and thus to its wavelength
constituency. Cones consist of (a) short-wavelength, or "blue", cones
sensitive to light typically in the
wavelength range of 380 - 520 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 420 - 440
nm, (b) medium-wavelength, or
"green", cones sensitive to light typically in the wavelength range of 440 -
650 nm with a typical peak sensitivity
at 535 - 555 nm, and (c) long-wavelength, or "red", cones sensitive to light
typically in the wavelength range of
480 - 780 nm with a typical peak sensitivity at 565 - 580 nm. As this data
indicates, the sensitivity ranges
overlap considerably, especially for green and red cones. Electrical impulses
indicative of the stimulation of rods
and cones by light are supplied to the brain which interprets the impulses to
assign an appropriate color pattern
to the light.
101411 Light entering the human eye at a wavelength in the medium-
wavelength range commonly
stimulates at least two of the three types of cones and often all three types.
An example clarifies this. Light in
the yellow range, largely 570 - 590 nm, stimulates red and green cones so that
the brain interprets the impulses
from the rods and red and green cones as yellow. Assume that the eye receives
equal intensities of light in the
green range, largely 490 - 570 nm, and the red range, largely 630 - 780 nm,
for stimulating red and green cones
the same as the light in the yellow range. The brain interprets the electrical
impulses from the rods and red and
green cones as yellow. Except for the colors at the ends of the visible
spectrum, there is normally a continuous
regime of suitable combinations for creating any color dependent on wavelength
and radiosity.
101421 A recitation that two or more colors materially differ herein means
that the colors differ materially as
viewed by a person of standard (or average) eyesight/brain-processing
capability. The verb "appear", including
grammatical variations such as "appearing", as used herein for the chromatic
characteristics of light means its
apparent color as perceived by the standard human eye/brain. A recitation that
a body appears along a surface
of the body as a specified color means that the body appears along the surface
"largely" as that color. In
particular, the spectral radiosity constituency of light of the specified
color may so vary across the surface that
the specified color is a composite of different colors. The surface portions
from where light of wavelengths
suitable for the different colors leave the body are usually so
microscopically distributed among one another
or/and occupy area sufficiently small that the standard human eye/brain
interprets that light as essentially a
single color.
10143j A "species" of light means light having a particular spectral
radiosity constituency. Although a light
species produces a color when only light of that species leaves a surface of a
body, only some of the below-
described light species are described as being of wavelength suitable for
forming colors. A recitation that
multiple species of the total light leaving a body along a surface area form
light of wavelength suitable for a
particular color also means that the body appears along the area as that
color. A recitation that light leaves a
body along an adjoining body means that the light leaves the first body along
the interface between the two
bodies and vice versa. When all the light leaving a body along an internal
interface with another body is of
- 29 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2617/657934
wavelength suitable for a selected color, the first body would visually appear
as the selected color along the
interface if it were an exposed surface.
101441 Each color identified below by notation beginning with a letter,
e.g., "A" or "X", means a selected
color. Each such selected color may be a single color or a combination of
colors appearing as a single color due
to suitable mixture of light of wavelengths of those colors. The expression
"light of wavelength" means one or
more subranges of the wavelength range of the visible spectrum. When a
particular color is identified by
reference notation, the terminology consisting of that reference notation
followed by the word "light" means a
species of light of wavelength of that color, i.e., suitable for forming that
color. For instance, "V light" means a
species of light of wavelength suitable for forming color V. A recitation that
two or more colors differ means that
light of those colors differs. If the colors are indicated as differing in a
particular way, e.g., usually or materially,
the light of those colors differ in the same way.
101451 Instances occur in which a body is described as reflecting or
emitting light of wavelength of a
selected color. Letting that light be termed the "selected color light", the
reflection or emission of the selected
color light may occur generally along a surface of the body, i.e., directly at
the surface or/and at locations
internal to the body within short distances of the surface such that the
reflected or emitted light does not undergo
significant attenuation in traveling those short distances. The body may be
sufficiently transmissive of the
selected color light that it is alternatively or additionally reflected or
emitted inside the body at substantial
distances away from the surface and undergoes significant attenuation before
exiting the body via the surface.
Light striking a body and not reflected by it is absorbed or/and transmitted
by it.
101461 The term "encompasses" means is common to (or includes), usually
along a surface. For instance,
a first item partly encompasses a second item when part of the area of the
second item along a suitable surface
is common to the first item. A description of an essentially two-dimensional
first item as "outwardly conforming"
to an essentially two-dimensional second item means that the perimeter of the
first item, or the outer perimeter
of the first item if it is shaped, e.g., as an annulus, to have outer and
inner perimeters relative to its center,
conforms to the perimeter of the second item, or to the outer perimeter of the
second item if it is likewise shaped
to have outer and inner perimeters relative to its center.
101471 A "thickness location" of a body means a location extending largely
fully through the body's
thickness. There are instances in which the transmissivity of a body at one or
more thickness locations to light
perpendicularly incident on the body at at least wavelength suitable for one
or more selected colors is presented
as a group of transmissivity specifications. These transmissivity
specifications include a usual minimum value
for the body's transmissivity to light perpendicularly incident on a surface
of the body at wavelength suitable for a
selected color where the body normally visually appears along the surface as a
principal color and where an
impact-dependent print area of the surface changes color in response to an
object impacting the surface at an
- 30 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
object-contact area generally outwardly conforming to the print area so that
it temporarily appears as changed
color materially different from the principal color.
101481 The body may have thickness locations where the transmissivity of
the perpendicularly incident
light is less than the usual minimum. If so, the corresponding locations along
the surface still normally appear as
the principal color due to phenomena such as light scattering and non-
perpendicular light reflection and by
arranging for such thickness locations to be sufficiently laterally small that
their actual colors are not significantly
perceivable by the standard human eye/brain. Any such corresponding locations
along the print area similarly
temporarily appear as the changed color, The body meets the requisite color
appearances along the surface,
including the print area, even though the body's transmissivity to the
incident light is less than the usual
minimum at one or more thickness locations.
101491 Material is transparent if the shape of a body separated from the
material only by air or vacuum can
be clearly and accurately seen through the material. The material is
transparent even if the body's shape is
magnified or shrunk as seen through the material. Transparent material is
clear transparent if the color(s) of the
body as seen through the material are the same as the body's actual color(s).
Transparent material is tinted
transparent if the color(s) of the body as seen through the material differ
from the body's actual color(s) due to
tinting light reflection by the material.
101501 Various instances are described below in which light incident on the
first region of a body
containing first and second regions is partly reflected and partly transmitted
by the first region so as to be
incident on the second region which at least partly reflects the transmitted
light. The light reflected by the first
region is of wavelength suitable for a first color. The light reflected by the
second region is of wavelength
suitable for a second color. Even if not explicitly stated, the two colors
necessarily differ because light reflection
by the first region causes the spectral radiosity constituency of the second
color to lack at least part of the
spectral radiosity constituency of the first color and thus to differ from the
spectral radiosity constituency of the
first color. If the two regions have identical reflection characteristics, the
second color is black because the first
region reflects the light needed for the second color to be non-black.
101511 The term 'impact-dependent' as used in describing a three-
dimensional region or a surface area
means that the lateral extent of the region or area depends on the lateral
extent of the location where an object
impacts the region or area. Impact-dependent segments of auxiliary layers,
electrode assemblies, electrode
structures, and core layers are often respectively described below as
auxiliary segments, assembly segments,
electrode segments, and core segments.
101521 An "arbitrary" shape means any shape and includes shapes not
significantly restricted to a largely
fixed characteristic, such as a largely fixed dimension, along the shape. An
arbitrary shape is not limited to one
or more predefined shapes such as polygons, regular closed curves, and finite-
width lines, straight or curved.
Recitations of an action occurring "along" a body or along a surface of a body
mean that the action occurs within
- 31 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
a short distance of the surface, often inside the body, and not necessarily at
the surface. The expressions
"situated fully along", "lying fully along", "extending fully along", and
grammatical variations mean adjoining
along substantially the entire length (of).
101531 The words "overlying" and "underlying" used below in describing
structures apply to the orientations
of those structures as shown in the drawings. The same applies to "over",
"above, "under", and "below" as used
in a directional sense in describing such structures. These six words are to
be interpreted to mean
corresponding other directional-sense words for structures configured
identical to, but oriented differently than,
those shown in the drawings.
101541 A majority component of a multi-component item is a component
constituting more than 50% of the
item according to a suitable measurement. An N% majority component of a multi-
component item is a
component constituting at least N% of the item where N is a number greater
than 50. Each provision that light of
a first species is a (or the) majority component of light of a second species
means that the light of the first
species is radiositywise, i.e., in terms of radiosity, a (or the) majority
component of light of the second species.
A majority component of a color means radiositywise a majority component of
light forming that color. The
percentage difference between two values of a parameter means the quotient,
converted to percent, of their
difference and average.
101551 The term "normally" refers to actions occurring during the normal
state, explained below, in the
object-impact structures of the invention, e.g., the expression "normally
appears" means visually appears during
the normal state. Other time-related terms, such as "usually" and "typically",
are used to describe actions
occurring during the normal state but not limited to occurring during the
normal state. The term "temporarily"
refers to actions occurring during the changed state, defined below, in the
object-impact structures, e.g., the
expression "temporarily appears" means visually appears during the changed
state. Force acting on a body
normal, i.e., perpendicular, to a surface where it is contacted by the body,
is termed "orthogonal" force herein to
avoid confusion with the meaning of "normal" otherwise used herein.
101561 The term "or/and" or "and/or" between a pair of items means either
or both items. Similarly,
"or/and" or "and/or" before the next-to-last item of three or more items means
any one or more, up to all, of the
items. Use of multiple groups of items in a sentence where each group of items
has an "or" before the last item
in that group means, except as the context otherwise indicates, that the first
items in the groups are associated
with each other, that the second items in the groups are associated with each
other, and so on. For instance, a
recitation of the form "Item J1, J2, or J3 is connected to item K1, K2, or K3"
means that item J1 is connected to
item Kl, item J2 is connected to item K2, and item J3 is connected to item K3.
The plural term "criteria" is
generally used below to describe the various types of standards used in the
invention because each type of
standards is generally capable of consisting of multiple standards.
- 32 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
101571 All recitations of the same, uniform, identical, a single, singly,
full, only, constant, fixed, all, the
entire, straight, flat, planar, parallel, perpendicular, conform, continuous,
adjacent, adjoin, opposite, symmetrical,
mirror image, simultaneous, independent, transparent, block, absorb, non-
emissive, passive, prevent, absent,
and grammatical variations ending in "Iy" respectively mean largely the same,
largely uniform, largely identical,
largely a single, largely singly, largely fully, largely only, largely
constant, largely fixed, largely all, largely the
entire, largely straight, largely flat, largely planar, largely parallel,
largely perpendicular, largely conform, largely
continuous, largely adjacent, largely adjoin, largely opposite, largely
symmetrical, largely mirror image, largely
simultaneous, largely independent, largely transparent, largely block, largely
absorb, largely non-emissive,
largely passive, largely prevent, largely absent, and "largely" followed by
the variations ending in "Iy" except as
otherwise indicated. A recitation that multiple light species form a further
light species includes the meaning that
the multiple species largely form the further light species. Each recitation
providing that later textual material is
the same as earlier textual material means that the earlier material is
incorporated by reference into the later
material.
101581 Each signal described below as being transmitted via a communication
path, e.g., in a network of
communication paths, is transmitted wirelessly or via one or more electrical
wires of that communication path. A
recitation that a body undergoes a change in response to a signal means that
that the change occurs due to a
change in a variable, e.g., current and voltage, in which the signal exists.
Light provided from a particular source
or in a particular way such as emission or reflection may be viewed as a light
beam. Light provided from
multiple sources or in multiple ways may be viewed as multiple light beams.
10159I The terms "conductive", "resistive", and "insulating" respectively
mean electrically conductive,
electrically resistive, and electrically insulating except as otherwise
indicated. A material having a resistivity less
than 10 ohm-cm at 300 K (approximately usual room temperature) is deemed to be
conductive. A material
having a resistivity greater than 1010 ohm-cm at 300 K is deemed to be
insulating (or dielectric). A material
having a resistivity from 10 ohm-cm to 10Th ohm-cm at 300 K is deemed to be
resistive. Resistive materials
conduct current with the conduction capability progressively increasing as the
resistivity decreases from 1010
ohm-cm to 10 ohm-cm at 300 K. Inasmuch as conductivity is the inverse of
resistivity, conductivity-based
criteria are numerically the inverse of resistivity-based criteria.
101601 The order in which the elements of an inorganic chemical compound
appear below in the
compound's chemical name or/and chemical formula generally follows the
standards of the International Union
of Pure and Applied Chemistry ('IUPAC'). That is, a more electronegative
element follows a less
electronegative element in the name and formula of an inorganic compound. In
some situations, use of the
IUPAC element-ordering convention for inorganic compounds results in element
orderings different from that
generally or sometimes used. Such situations are accommodated herein by
presenting other orderings of the
chemical formulas in brackets following the IUPAC chemical formulas.
- 33 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
101611 The following acronyms are used as adjectives below to shorten the
description. "AB" means
assembly. "ALA" means attack-line-adjoining. "ALV" means attack-line-vicinity.
"BC" means backcourt. "BLA"
means baseline-adjoining. "BP" means beyond-path. "By" means boundary-
vicinity. "CC" means color-
change. "CE" means changeably emissive. "Cl" means characteristics-
identifying. "C LA' means centerline-
adjoining. "CM" means criteria-meeting. "COM" means communication. "CR" means
changeably reflective.
"DE" means duration-extension. "DF" means deformation. "DP" means distributed-
pressure. "ELA" means
endline-adjoining or end-line-adjoining. "EM" means electromagnetic. "FA"
means far auxiliary. "FC" means
fixed-color. "FE" means far electrode. "FLT" means foul-territory. "FLV" means
foul-line-vicinity. "FRT" means
fair-territory. "GAB" means general assembly. "GFA" means general far
auxiliary. "HA" means half-alley. "IB"
means inbounds. "ID" means "impact-dependent". "IDVC" means impact-dependent
variable-color. "IF" means
interface. "IG" means image-generating. "P" means information-presentation.
"IS" means impact-sensitive.
"ISCC" means impact-sensitive color-change. "LA" means line-adjoining. "LC"
means liquid-crystal. "LE"
means light-emissive. "LI" means location-identifying. "NA" means near
auxiliary. "NE" means near electrode.
"OB" means out-of-bounds. "QC" means object-contact. "01" means object-impact.
"OS" means object-
separation. "OT" means object-tracking. "PA" means print-area. "PAY" means
print-area vicinity. "PS" means
pressure-spreading. "PSCC" means pressure-sensitive color-change. "PZ" means
polarization. "RA" means
reflection-adjusting. "QC" means quartercourt "SC" means servicecourt. "SF"
means surface. "SLA" means
sideline-adjoining or side-line-adjoining. "SS" means surface-structure.
"SVLA" means serviceline-adjoining.
"TH" means threshold. "VA" means voltage-application. "VC" means variable-
color. "WI" means wavelength-
independent. "XN" means transition. "3P" means three-point. "3PL" means three-
point-line. "3PLV" means
three-point-line-vicinity.
Basic Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region
101621 Figs. 5a - Sc (collectively "Fig. 5") illustrate the layout of a
basic object-impact structure 100 which
undergoes reversible color changes along an externally exposed surface 102
according to the invention when
exposed surface 102 is impacted by an object 104 during an activity such as a
sport. "01" hereafter means
object-impact. "Impact" hereafter means impact of object 104 on surface 102.
Fig. 5a presents the general
layout of 01 structure 100. Figs. 5b and Sc depict exemplary color changes
that occur along surface 102 due to
the impact. Object 104 leaves surface 102 subsequent to impact and is
indicated in dashed line in Figs. 5b and
5c at locations shortly after impact. Although object 104 is often directed
toward particular locations on surface
102, object 104 can generally impact anywhere on surface 102.
101631 Object 104 is typically airborne and separated from other solid
matter prior to impact. For a sports
activity, object 104 is typically a sports instrument such as a spherical
ball, e.g., a tennis ball, basketball, or
volleyball when the activity is tennis, basketball, or volleyball. Object 104
can, however, be part of a larger body
- 34 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
that may not be airborne prior to impact. For instance, object 104 can be a
shoe on a foot of a person such as a
tennis, basketball, or volleyball player. Different embodiments of 01
structure 100 can be employed, usually in
different parts of surface 102, so that the embodiments of object 104 differ
from 01 embodiment to 01
embodiment
[01641 01 structure 100, which serves as or in an information-presentation
structure, is used in determining
whether object 104 impacts a specified zone of surface 102. In this regard,
structure 100 contains a principal
variable-color region 106 and a secondary fixed-color region 108 which meet at
a region-region interface 110.
"VC" and "FC" hereafter respectively mean variable-color and fixed-color.
Although interface 110 appears
straight in Fig. 5, VC region 106 and FC region 108 can be variously
geometrically configured along interface
110, e.g., curved, or flat and curved. They can meet at corners. FC region 108
can extend partly or fully
laterally around VC region 106 and vice versa. For instance, region 108 can
adjoin region 106 along two or
more sides of region 106 if it is shaped laterally like a polygon and vice
versa.
101651 VC region 106 extends to surface 102 at a principal VC surface zone
112 and normally appears
along it as a principal surface color A during the activity. See Fig. 5a. "SF"
hereafter means surface. This
occurs because only A light normally leaves region 106 along SF zone 112.
Region 106 is then in a state
termed the "normal state". Recitations hereafter of (a) region 106 normally
appearing as principal SF color A
mean that region 106 normally appears along zone 112 as color A, (b) A light
leaving region 106 mean that A
light leaves it via zone 112, and (c) colors and color changes respectively
mean colors present, and color
changes occurring, during the activity. Region 106 contains principal impact-
sensitive color-change structure
along or below all of zone 112. "1SCC" hereafter means impact-sensitive color-
change. Examples of the ISCC
structure, not separately indicated in Fig. 5, are described below and shown
in later drawings. Region 106 may
contain other structure described below.
101661 FC region 108, which extends to surface 102 at a secondary FC SF
zone 114, fixedly appears
along FC SF zone 114 as a secondary SF color A. Secondary SF color A' is often
the same as, but can differ
significantly from, principal color A. Region 108 can consist of multiple
secondary FC subregions extending to
zone 114 so that consecutive ones appear along zone 114 as different secondary
colors A'. Except as indicated
below, region 108 is hereafter treated as appearing along zone 114 as only one
color A'. SF zones 112 and 114
meet at an SF edge of interface 110.
101671 An impact-dependent portion of VC region 106 responds to object 104
impacting SF zone 112 at a
principal impact-dependent object-contact area 116 (laterally) spanning where
object 104 contacts (or
contacted) zone 112 by temporarily appearing along a corresponding principal
impact-dependent print area 118
of zone 112 as a generic changed SF color X (a) in some general 01 embodiments
if the impact meets (or
satisfies) principal basic threshold impact criteria or (b) in other general
01 embodiments if region 106,
specifically the impact-dependent portion, is provided with a principal
general color-change control signal
- 35 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
generated in response to the impact meeting the principal basic threshold
impact criteria sometimes
(conditionally) dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those
other embodiments. See Figs. 5b and
5c. "ID", "OC", "TH", and "CC" hereafter respectively mean impact-dependent,
object-contact, threshold, and
color-change. The ID portion of region 106 is hereafter termed the principal
IDVC portion where "IDVC'
hereafter means impact-dependent variable-color. Instances in which the
principal IDVC portion, often simply
the IDVC portion, changes to appear as generic changed SF color X along ID
print area 118 in response to the
principal general CC control signal are described below, particularly
beginning with the structure of Figs. 64a
and 64b.
101681 ID OC area 116 is capable of being of substantially arbitrary shape.
Print area 118 constitutes part
of zone 112, all of which is capable of temporarily appearing as generic
changed SF color X. Print area 118
closely matches OC area 116 in size, shape, and location. In particular, print
area 118 at least partly
encompasses OC area 116, at least mostly, usually fully, outwardly conforms to
it, and is largely concentric with
it. The principal basic TH impact criteria can vary with where print area 118
occurs in zone 112.
101691 When VC region 106 includes structure besides the ISCC structure, an
ID segment of the ISCC
structure specifically responds to object 104 impacting OC area 116 by causing
the IDVC portion to temporarily
appear along print area 118 as changed color X (a) in some general 01
embodiments if the impact meets the
basic TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments if the ID ISCC
segment is provided with the
general CC control signal generated in response to the impact meeting the
basic TH impact criteria again
sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other
embodiments. In any event, the
appearance of the IDVC portion along area 118 as changed SF color X occurs
because only X light temporarily
leaves the IDVC portion along area 118. Color X differs materially from color
A and usually from color A'.
Hence, X light differs materially from A light. Recitations hereafter of (a)
the IDVC portion temporarily appearing
as color X mean that the IDVC portion temporarily appears along area 118 as
color X and (b) X light leaving the
IDVC portion mean that X light leaves it via area 118.
101701 Importantly, the impact usually leads to color change along surface
102 only at print area 118
closely matching OC area 116 in size, shape, and location. Although other
impacts of object 104 may cause
color change at other locations along surface 102, a particular impact of
object 104 usually does not lead to, and
is usually incapable of leading to, color change at any location along surface
102 other than print area 118 for
that impact. Persons viewing surface 102 therefore need essentially not be
concerned about a false color
change along surface 102, i.e., a color change not accurately representing
area 116.
101711 The spectral radiosity constituency of A light may vary across SF
zone 112. That is, principal color
A may be a composite of different colors such as primary colors red, green,
and blue. The parts of zone 112
from where light of wavelengths for the different colors leaves zone 112 are
usually so microscopically
- 36 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073
PCT/US2017/057934
distributed among one another that the standard human eye/brain interprets
that light as essentially a single
color.
1 721 The spectral radiosity constituency of X light may similarly vary
across print area 118 so that
changed color X is also a composite of different colors. One color in such a
color X composite may be color A
or, if it is a composite of different colors, one or more colors in the color
X composite may be the same as one or
more colors in the color A composite. If so, the parts of area 118 from where
light of wavelengths for the
different colors in the color X composite leaves area 118 are so
microscopically distributed among one another
that, across area 118, the standard human eye/brain does not separately
distinguish color A or any color
identical to a color in the color A composite. Color X, specifically the color
X composite, still differs materially
from color A despite the color X composite containing color A or a color
identical to a color in the color A
composite.
101 731 The principal basic TH impact criteria consist of one or more TH
impact characteristics which the
impact must meet for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X. There
are two primary locations for
assessing the impacts effects to determine whether the TH impact criteria are
met: (i) directly at SF zone 112
and (ii) along a plane, termed the internal plane, extending laterally through
VC region 106 generally parallel to,
and spaced apart from, zone 112. In either case, the impact is typically
characterized by an impact parameter P
that varies between a perimeter (first) value P,õ and an interior (second)
value P. For zone 112, perimeter
value Pp, exists along the perimeter of OC area 116 while interior value P,r,
exists at one or more points inside
area 116. For the internal plane, perimeter value Pp, exists along the
perimeter of a projection of area 116 onto
the internal plane while interior value Põ, exists at one or more points
inside that projection. Area 116 and the
projection can differ in size as long as a line extending perpendicular to
area 116 through its center also extends
perpendicular to the projection through its center. The difference
between values Pp: and Pin is the
absolute value of the maximum difference between any two values of impact
parameter P across area 116 or
the projection.
101741 For the situation in which the IDVC portion temporarily appears as
changed color X if the impact
meets the basic TH impact criteria and thus momentarily putting aside the
situation dealt with further below in
which the IDVC portion temporarily appears as color X if the ID ISCC segment
is provided with the general CC
control signal generated in response to both the TH impact criteria and other
impact criteria being met, the TH
impact criteria are met at each point, termed a criteria-meeting point, inside
OC area 116 or the projection of
area 116 where the absolute value AP of the difference between impact
parameter P and perimeter value Pp,
equals or exceeds a local TH value API,' of parameter difference P. "CM"
hereafter means criteria-meeting.
Local TH parameter difference value P1 lies between zero and maximum parameter
difference For
each CM point, a corresponding point along SF zone 112 temporarily appears
along zone 112 as color X.
These changed-color points form print area 118.
- 37 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
101751 If the impacts effects are assessed along SF zone 112, each changed-
color point along zone 112
is usually the same as the corresponding CM point. Print area 118 is smaller
than OC area 116 because a band
120 not containing any CM point lies between the perimeters of areas 116 and
118. Perimeter band 120
appears as color A as indicated in Figs. 5b and 5c. If the impact's effects
are assessed along the internal plane,
each changed-color point along zone 112 is usually located opposite, or nearly
opposite, the corresponding CM
point. Print area 118 can be smaller or larger than OC area 116 depending on
the size of area 116 relative to
that of the projection. Print area 118 is usually smaller than OC area 116
when the projection is of the same
size as, or smaller than, area .116. Depending on how well print area 118
outwardly conforms to 00 area 1.16,
area 118 can be partly inside and partly outside area 116 in the projection
case.
10176j Local TH parameter difference value APthl is preferably the same at
every point subject to the TH
impact criteria. If so, local difference value APthi is replaced with a fixed
global TH value APti,c, of parameter
difference AP. Local TH value AP1h1 can, however, differ from point to point
subject to the TH impact criteria. In
that case, the APti-d values for the points subject to the TH impact criteria
form a local TH parameter difference
function dependent on the location of each point subject to the TH impact
criteria.
101771 Impact parameter P can be implemented in various ways. In one
implementation, parameter P is
pressure resulting from object 104 impacting SF zone 112, specifically OC area
116. In the following material,
normal pressure at any point in VC region 106 means pressure existent at that
point when it is not significantly
subjected to any effect of the impact. Normal SF pressure along zone 112 means
normal external pressure,
usually atmospheric pressure nominally 1 atm, along zone 112. Normal internal
pressure at any point inside
region 106 means internal pressure existent at that point when it is not
significantly subjected to any effect of the
impact. Excess pressure at any point of region 106 means pressure in excess of
normal pressure at that point.
Excess SF pressure along zone 112 then means pressure in excess of normal SF
pressure along zone 112.
Excess internal pressure at any point inside region 106 means internal
pressure in excess of normal internal
pressure at that point.
101781 Object 104 exerts force on 00 area 116 during the impact. This force
is expressible as excess SF
pressure across area 116. The excess SF pressure reaches a maximum value at
one or more points inside
area 116 and drops largely to zero along its perimeter. With the excess SF
pressure across SF zone 112
embodying impact parameter difference AP, the TH impact criteria become
principal basic excess SF pressure
criteria requiring that the excess pressure at a point along zone 112 equal or
exceed a local TH value for that
point in order for it to be a TH CM point and temporarily appear as color X.
Each local TH excess SF pressure
value, which can embody local TH parameter difference value APtr,i depending
on the internal configuration of 01
structure 100, lies between zero and the maximum excess SF pressure value.
[01791 Reducing the TH values of excess SF pressure causes the size of A-
colored perimeter band 120 to
be reduced and print area 118 to more closely match 00 area 116. However, this
also causes SF zone 112 to
- 38 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
be susceptible to undesired color changes due to bodies other than object 104
impacting zone 112 with less
force than object 104 usually impacts zone 112. The TH excess SF pressure
values are chosen to be
sufficiently ow as to make band 120 quite small while limiting the likelihood
of such undesired color changes as
much as reasonably feasible.
101801 The excess SF pressure causes excess internal pressure to be
produced inside VC region 106.
The excess internal pressure is localized mostly to material along 00 area
116. Similar to the excess SF
pressure, the excess internal pressure along the projection of area 116 onto
the internal plane reaches a
maximum value at one or more points inside the projection and drops largely to
zero along its perimeter. The
excess internal pressure along the internal plane can embody impact parameter
difference P. The TH impact
criteria along the internal plane become principal basic excess internal
pressure criteria requiring that the excess
internal pressure at a point along the internal plane equal or exceed a local
TH value for that point in order for
the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to temporarily appear as color X.
Each local TH excess internal
pressure value, which can embody local TH parameter difference value APthi,
lies between zero and the
maximum excess internal pressure value.
101811 The impact usually causes VC region 106 to significantly deform
along OC area 116. If so, impact
parameter P can be a measure of the deformation. For this purpose, item 122 in
Fig, 5b or 5c indicates the ID
area where the impact causes SF zone 112 to deform. Area 122, termed the
principal SF deformation area,
outwardly conforms to 00 area 116 and encompasses at least part of, usually
most of, area 116. "DF" hereafter
means deformation. Although ID SF DF area .122 is sometimes slightly smaller
than OC area 116, area 116 is
also labeled as area 122 in Figs. 5b and 5c and in later drawings to simplify
the representation. Item 124 in Fig.
5b or 5c indicates the total ID area where object 104 contacts surface 102
and, as shown in Fig. 5c, can extend
into FC SF zone 114.
101821 The deformation reaches a maximum value at one or more points inside
SF DF area 122 and drops
largely to zero along its perimeter. With the deformation along SF zone 112
embodying impact parameter
difference AP, the TH impact criteria become principal basic SF DF criteria
requiring that the deformation at a
point along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value for that point in order
for it to temporarily appear as color
X. Each local TH SF DF value lies between zero and the maximum SF DF value.
Inasmuch as reducing the TH
SF DF values for causing print area 118 to more closely match OC area 116 also
causes zone 112 to be
susceptible to undesired color changes due to bodies other than object 104
impacting zone 112 with less force
than object 104 usually impacts zone 112, the TH SF DF values are chosen to be
sufficiently low as to achieve
good matching between areas 116 and 118 while limiting the likelihood of such
undesired color changes as
much as reasonably feasible,
[0183] The deformation along SF zone 112 may go into a vibrating mode in
which the IDVC portion
contacts and expands at an amplitude that rapidly dies out. Such vibrational
deformation may sometimes be
- 39 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
needed for the IDVC portion to temporarily appear as color X. If vibrational
deformation occurs, the associated
range of frequencies arising from the impact can be incorporated into the
principal SF DF criteria to further
reduce the likelihood of undesired color changes.
10184I Local TH value APthi of impact parameter difference AP has been
described above as essentially a
fixed value so that the color along the perimeter of print area 118 changes
abruptly from color A to color X in
moving from outside aea 118 to inside it. However, the temporary color change
along the perimeter of area 118
often occurs in a narrow transition band (not shown) which extends along the
perimeter of area 118 and in which
the color progressively changes from color A to color X in crossing from
outside the perimeter transition band to
inside it. This arises because the transition from color A to color X largely
starts to occur as parameter
difference AP passes a low local TH value APthil for each point subject to the
TH impact criteria and largely
completes the color change as difference AP passes, for that point, a high
local TH value APthih greater than low
value ANA. Local TH value APth: for each point subject to the TH impact
criteria is typically that point's high TH
value Om but can be a value between, e.g., halfway between, that point's TH
values EXP!hil and APthih. For
implementations of difference AP with excess pressure or deformation, the
transition from color A to color X
largely starts to occur as excess pressure or deformation passes a low local
TH excess pressure or DF value for
each point subject to the TH impact criteria and largely completes the color
change as excess pressure or
deformation passes a high local TH excess pressure or DF value for that point.
101851 01 structure 100 is usually arranged and operated so that generic
changed color X is capable of
being only a single (actual) color. However, the principal basic TH impact
criteria can consist of multiple sets of
fully different, i.e., nonoverlapping, principal basic TH impact criteria
respectively corresponding to multiple
specific (or specified) changed colors materially different from principal
color A. More than one, typically all, of
the specific changed colors differ, usually materially. The impact on OC area
116 of SF zone 112 is potentially
capable of meeting (or satisfying) any of the principal basic TH impact
criteria sets. If the impact meets the
basic TH impact criteria, generic changed color X is the specific changed
color for the basic TH impact criteria
set actually met by the impact sometimes dependent on other criteria also
being met. The basic TH impact
criteria sets usually form a continuous chain in which consecutive criteria
sets meet each other without
overlapping.
101861 The basic TH impact criteria sets can sometimes be mathematically
described as follows in terms
of impact parameter difference P. Letting n be an integer greater than 1, n
principal basic TH impact criteria
sets Si, S2, ... S, are respectively associated with n specific changed colors
Xl, X2, Xr: materially different
from principal color A and with n progressively increasing local TH parameter
difference values AP2, = =
. APthi,r, lying between zero and maximum parameter difference AP,,,,,. Each
local TH parameter difference
value APthi,,, except lowest-numbered value APtho, thereby exceeds next-lowest-
numbered value LIPthl,j-1 where
integer i varies from 1 to n.
-40 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
101871 Each basic TH impact criteria set Si, except highest-numbered
criteria set Sn, is defined by the
requirement that parameter difference AP equal or exceed local TH parameter
difference value APtha but be no
greater than an infinitesimal amount below a higher local parameter difference
value APN,,i less than or equal to
next higher local TH parameter difference value APtho.i. Each criteria set Si,
except set Srõ is a AP range R
extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value APihu and a high
limit an infinitesimal amount below
high difference value APthh,i. Highest-numbered criteria set S., is defined by
the requirement that difference AP
equal or exceed local TH parameter difference value APIN.,-; but not exceed a
higher local parameter difference
value APti,,,õ less than or equal to maximum parameter difference
Hence, highest-numbered set Sr, is a
AP range Rõ extending between a low limit equal to TH difference value APIa.,
and a high limit equal to high
difference value APt,h,õ.
101881 High-limit difference value APtõ,., for each range Ri, except
highest range Rn, usually equals low-
limit difference value APth+1 for next higher range R,,t, and high-limit
difference value APtwi, for highest range
R0 usually equals maximum difference In that case, criteria sets Si - S,
substantially fully cover a total
AP range extending continuously from lowest difference value AP
th1,1 to maximum difference APm3x. Impact
parameter difference AP c potentially capable of meeting any of criteria sets
Si - S. If the impact meets the TH
impact criteria so that difference AP meets the TH impact criteria, changed
color X is specific changed color Xi
for criteria set Si actually met by difference AP. Should each local TH
difference value API,Li be the same at
every point subject to the TH impact criteria, each local TH difference value
APthi,, is replaced with a fixed global
TH value APtrai of difference AP.
101891 The TH impact criteria sets can, for example, consist of fully
different ranges of excess SF pressure
across OC area 116 or excess internal pressure along the projection of area
116 onto the internal plane. Each
range of excess SF or internal pressure is associated with a different one of
the specific changed colors.
Changed color X is then specific changed color Xi for the range of excess SF
or internal pressure met by the
impact. The low limit of each pressure range is the minimum value of excess SF
or internal pressure for causing
color X to be specific changed color Xi for that pressure range. The high
limit of each pressure range, except
the highest pressure range, is preferably an infinitesimal amount below the
low limit of the next highest range so
that the TH impact criteria sets occupy a continuous total pressure range
beginning at the low limit of the lowest
range. All the specific changed colors X, - Xi, preferably differ materially
from one another.
10190) Use of TH impact criteria sets provides a capability to distinguish
between certain different types of
impacts. For instance, if the maximum excess SF pressure usually exerted by
one embodiment of object 104
exceeds the minimum excess SF pressure usually exerted by another embodiment
of object 104, appropriate
choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables 01 structure 100 to distinguish
between impacts of the two object
embodiments. In tennis, suitable choice of the TH impact criteria sets enables
structure 100 to distinguish
between impacts of a tennis ball and impacts of other bodies which usually
impact SF zone 112 harder or softer
- 41 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
than a tennis ball. Color X is generally dealt with below as a single color
even though it can be provided as one
of multiple changed colors dependent on the TH impact criteria sets.
19 11 The change, or switch, from color A to color X along print area 118
places VC region 106 in a state,
termed the "changed" state, in which X light temporarily leaves the IDVC
portion along area 118. In the changed
state, region 106 continues to appear as color A along the remainder of SF
zone 112 except possibly at any
location where another temporary change to color X occurs during the current
temporary color change due to
object 104 also impacting zone 112 so as to meet the TH impact criteria. The
1DVC portion later returns to
appearing as color A. If another change to color X occurs during the current
temporary color change at any
location along zone 112 due to another impact, any other such location along
zone 112 likewise later returns to
appearing as color A. Region 106 later returns to appearing as color A along
all of zone 112 so as to return, or
switch back, to the normal state. The impacts can be by the same or different
embodiments of object 104.
101921 An occurrence of the changed state herein means only the temporary
color change due to the
impact causing that changed-state occurrence. If, during a changed-state
occurrence, object 104 of the same or
a different embodiment again impacts SF zone 112 sufficient to meet the TH
impact criteria, any temporary color
change which that further impact causes along zone 112 during the current
changed-state occurrence
constitutes another changed-state occurrence. Multiple changed-state
occurrences can thus overlap in time.
Print area 118 of one of multiple time-overlapping changed-state occurrences
can also overlap with area 118 of
at least one other one of those changed-state occurrences. The situation of
multiple time-overlapping changed-
state occurrences is not expressly mentioned further below in order to shorten
this description. However, any
recitation below specifying that a VC region, such as VC region 106, returns
to the normal state after the
changed state means that, if there are multiple time-overlapping changed-state
occurrences, the VC region
returns to the normal state after the last of those occurrences without
(fully) returning to the normal state directly
after any earlier one of those occurrences.
[01931 VC region 106 is in the changed state for a CC duration (or time
period) Litd, generally defined as
the interval from the time at which print area 118 first fully appears as
changed color X to the time at which area
118 starts returning to color A, i.e., the interval during which area 118
temporarily appears as color X. CC
duration a, is usually at least 2 s in order to allow persons using 01
structure 100 sufficient time to clearly
determine that area 118 exists and where it exists along SF zone 112. Duration
Atdr is often at least 4 s,
sometimes at least 6 s, and is usually no more than 60 s but can be 120 s or
more.
101941 In particular, the Atdr length depends considerably on the type of
activity for which 01 structure 100
is being used. If the activity is a ball-based sport such as tennis,
basketball, volleyball, or baseball/softball. CC
duration Atdr is desirably long enough for players and observers, including
any sports official(s), to clearly
determine the location of print area 118 on SF zone 112 but not so long as to
significantly interrupt play. The
iltd, length for such a sport is usually at least 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, or 12 s, can
be at least 15, 20, or 30s, and is usually
- 42 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073
PCT/US2017/057934
no more than 60 s but can be longer, e.g., up to 90 or 120 s or more, or
shorter, e.g.. no more than 30, 20, 15,
10, 8, or 6 s. For such a ball-based sport in which the ball embodying object
104 bounces off surface 102,
duration Atdr is usually much longer than the time duration (or contact time)
tito,, almost always less than 25 ms,
during which the ball contacts zone 112 during the impact.
101951 CC duration Atdr may be at an automatic (or natural) value Atdraõ
that includes a base portion albs
passively determined by the (physical/chemical) properties of the material(s)
in the ISCC structure. Base
duration Atjrbs is fixed (constant) for a given set of environmental
conditions, including a given external
temperature and a given external pressure, nominally 1 atm, at identical
impact conditions. VC region 106 may
contain componentry, described below, which automatically extends duration
Atdr by an amount Atdrext beyond
base duration Atdrbs. Automatic duration value Atd,,, consists of base
duration Atd,t, and potentially extension
duration At
¨text. Automatic value is
usually at least 2 s, often at least 4 s, sometimes at least 6 s, and
usually no more than 60 s, often no more than 30s, sometimes no more than 15
s. Absent externally caused
adjustment, the changed state automatically terminates at the end of value
Atdrõ.
101961 Automatic duration value Atdr,õ is usually in a principal pre-
established CC time duration range, i.e.,
an impact-to-impact Atd, range established prior to impact. The length of the
pre-established CC duration range,
i.e., the time period between its tow and high ends from impact to impact is
relatively small, usually no more
than 2 s, preferably no more than 1 s, more preferably no more than 0.5 s, so
that the impact-to-impact variation
in automatic value Atd,õ is quite small.
101971 The appearance of VC region 106 as color A during the normal state
occurs while 01 structure 100
is in operation. The production of color A during structure operation often
occurs passively, i.e., only by light
reflection. Region 106 thus appears as color A when structure 100 is inactive.
However, color A can be
produced actively, e.g., by an action involving light emission from region
106. If so, the light emission is usually
terminated to save power when structure 100 is inactive. In that case, region
106 appears as another color,
termed passive color P, along SF zone 112 while structure 100 is inactive.
Passive color P, which can be the
same as secondary color A', necessarily differs from color A and usually from
color X.
101981 Fig. 5b presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102
fully within SF zone 112.
Total ID OC area 124 here is the same as OC area 116. Print area 118
encompasses most of, and fully
conforms to, OC area 116 so that areas 116 and 118 are largely concentric.
Hence, print area 118 fully
outwardly conforms to OC area 116. Fig. 22a below presents an example, similar
to that of Fig. 5b, in which
print area 118 fully outwardly conforms to OC area 116 and does not fully
inwardly conform to area 116.
101991 Fig. Sc presents an example in which object 104 contacts surface 102
within both of SF zones 112
and 114 in the same impact. Total OC area 124 here consists of OC area 116 and
an adjoining secondary ID
OC area 126 of zone 114. The impact on secondary ID OC area 126 does not cause
it to change color
significantly. Hence, area 126 largely remains secondary color A. Print area
118 at least partly encompasses
- 43 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
00 area 116 and may, or may not, encompass most of it depending on the sizes
of OC areas 116 and 126 and
perimeter band 120 relative to one another, Print area 118 fully outwardly
conforms to OC area 116 so as to be
largely concentric with it Fig. 22b below presents an example, similar to that
of Fig. 5c, in which print area 118
outwardly conforms mostly, but not fully, to OC area 116 and does not inwardly
conform mostly to it.
102001 The impact on both of OC areas 116 and 126 is sometimes insufficient
to meet the principal TH
impact criteria for principal area 116 even though the TH impact criteria
would be met if total OC area 124 were
in SF zone 112. If so, area 116 may continue to appear as color A.
Alternatively, FO region 108 contains
impact-sensitive material extending along interface 110 to a distance
approximately equal to the maximum
lateral dimension of print area 118 during impacts. Although secondary OC area
126 remains color A' after the
impact, the combination of the impact-sensitive material in region 108 and the
1SCC material in VC region 106
causes print area 118 to temporarily appear as color X if the impact meets
composite basic TH impact criteria
usually numerically the same as the principal basic TH impact criteria.
10201j Figs. 6a - 6c, 11a - 11c, 12a - 12c, 13a - 13c, 14a - 14c, 15a -
15c, 16a - 16c, 17a - 17c, 18a -18c,
and 19a - 19c present side cross sections of ten embodiments of 01 structure
100 where each triad of Figs. ja -
jc for integer j being 6 and then varying from 11 to 19 depicts a different
embodiment The basic side cross
sections, and thus how the embodiments appear in the normal state, are
respectively shown in Figs. 6a, 11a,
12a, 13a, 14a, 15a, 16a, 17a, 18a, and 19a corresponding to Fig. 5a. Figs. 6b,
lib, 12b, 13b, 141), 15b, 16b,
17b, 18b, and 19b corresponding to Fig. 5b present examples of changes that
occur during the changed state
when object 104 impacts fully within SF zone 112. Figs. 6c, 11c, 12c, 13c,
14c, 15c, 16c, 17c, 18c, and 19c
present examples of changes that occur during the changed state when object
104 simultaneously impacts both
of SF zones 112 and 114.
10202) Referring to Figs. Ga - 6c (collectively "Fig. 6"), they illustrate
a general embodiment 130 of 01
structure 100 for which duration Att of the changed state is automatic value
Atdraõ absent externally caused
adjustment. VC region 106 here consists only of the 1500 structure indicated
here and later as item 132. In
Fig. 6, surface 102 is flat and extends parallel to a plane generally tangent
to Earth's surface. However, surface
102 can be significantly curved. Even when surface 102 is flat, it can extend
at a significant angle to a plane
generally tangent to Earth's surface as exemplified below in Figs. 102a and
102b. Interface 110 between color
regions 106 and 108 extends perpendicular to surface 102. See Fig. 6a.
Interface 110 can be a flat surface or a
curved surface which appears straight along a plane extending through regions
106 and 108 perpendicular to
surface 102. Regions 106 and 108 lie on a substructure (or substrate) 134
usually consisting of insulating
material at least where they meet substructure 134 along a flat region-
substructure interface 136 extending
parallel to surface 102.
102031 Largely no light is usually transmitted or emitted by substructure
134 so as to cross interface 136
and exit VC region 106 via SF zone 112. Nor does largely any light usually
enter region 106 along interface 110
- 44 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
or any other side surface of region 106 so as to exit it via zone 112. In
short, light usually enters region 106 only
along zone 112. Changes in the visual appearance of region 106 largely depend
only on (a) incident light
reflected by region 106 so as to exit it via zone 112, (b) any light emitted
by region 106 and exiting it via zone
112, and (c) any light entering region 106 along zone 112, passing through
region 106, reflected by substructure
134, passing back through region 106, and exiting it along zone 112.
102041 Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along
VC region 106 during the normal
state is termed ARsb light. Preferably, no ARsb light is present. All light
striking SF zone 112 is preferably
absorbed by region 106 or/and reflected by it so as to leave it via zone 112,
interface 110, or another such side
surface. Region 106, potentially in combination with FC region 108, may be
manufactured as a separate unit
and later installed on substructure 134. If so, absence of ARsb light enables
the color characteristics, including
CC characteristics, of region 106 to be independent of the color
characteristics of substructure 134.
102051 Light, termed ADic light, normally leaving ISCC structure 132 via SF
zone 112 after being reflected
or/and emitted by structure 132, and thus excluding any substructure-reflected
ARsb light, consists of (a) light,
termed ARic light, normally reflected by structure 132 so as to leave it via
zone 112 after striking zone 112 and
(b) light (if any), termed AEic light, normally emitted by structure 132 so as
to leave it via zone 112. Reflected
ARic light is invariably always present. Emitted AEic light may or may not be
present. A substantial part of any
ARsb light passes through structure 132. ARic light, any AEic light, and any
ARsb light normally leaving
structure 132, and thus VC region 106, via zone 112 form A light. Region 106
thereby normally appears as color
A. Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light is usually a majority
component, preferably a 75% majority
component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of A light.
102061 Referring to Figs. 6b and 6c, item 138 is the IDVC portion of VC
region 106, i.e., the changed
portion which appears along print area 118 as color X during the changed
state. Area 118 is then the upper
surface of IDVC portion 138, basically a cylinder whose cross-sectional area
is that of area 118. The lateral
boundary of portion 138 extends perpendicular to SF zone 112. Object 104 in
Figs. 6b and 6c appears above
surface 102 at locations corresponding respectively to those in Figs. 5b and
5c and therefore at locations
subsequent to impacting OC area 116.
102071 Print area 118 is shown in Figs. 6b and 6c and in analogous later
side cross-sectional drawings
with extra thick line to clearly identify the print-area location along SF
zone 112. IDVC portion 138 is laterally
demarcated in Fig. 6b and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings
with dotted lines because its location
in VC region 106 depends on where object 104 contacts zone 112. Portion 138 is
laterally demarcated in Fig.
6c and in analogous later side cross-sectional drawings with a dotted line and
the solid line of interface 110
because portion 138 terminates along interface 110 in those drawings. Item 142
in Figs. 6b and 6c is the
principal ID segment of ISCC structure 132 in portion 138 and is identical to
it here. However, ID ISCC segment
- 45 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
142 is a part of portion 138 in later embodiments of 01 structure 100 where
region 106 contains structure
besides ISCC structure 132.
102081 Light (if any) reflected by substructure 134 so as to leave it along
IDVC portion 138 during the
changed state is termed XRsb light. XRsb light can be the same as, or
significantly differ from, ARsb light
depending on how the light processing in portion 138 during the changed state
differs from the light processing
in VC region 106 during the normal state. XRsb light is absent when ARsb light
is absent.
102091 Light, termed XDic light, temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 via
print area 118 after being
reflected or/and emitted by segment 142, and thus excluding any substructure-
reflected XRsb light, consists of
(a) light, termed XRic light, temporarily reflected by segment 142 so as to
leave it via area 118 after striking area
118 and (b) light (if any), termed XEic light, temporarily emitted by segment
142 so as to leave it via area 118.
Reflected XRic light is invariably always present. Emitted XEic light may or
may not be present. XDic light
differs materially from A and ADic light. A substantial part of any XRsb light
passes through segment 142. XRic
light, any XEic light, and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and
thus IDVC portion 138, via area
118 form X light so that portion 138 temporarily appears as color X. Each of
XDic light and either XRic or XEic
light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component,
more preferably a 90% majority
component, of X light.
Timing and Color-difference Parameters
102101 VC region 106 of 01 structure 130 starts the forward transition from
the normal state to the changed
state before or after object 104 leaves SF zone 112 depending on the length of
duration At during which object
104 contacts OC area 116. Region 106 can even enter the changed state before
object 104 leaves zone 112.
However, a person cannot generally see print area 118 until object 104 leaves
zone 112. One important timing
parameter is thus the full forward transition delay (response time) Ati, if
any, extending from the instant, termed
object-separation time tos, at which object 104 just fully separates from area
116 to the instant, termed
approximate forward transition end time tfe, at which region 106 approximately
completes the forward transition
and IDVC portion 138 approximately first appears as changed color X. "OS" and
"XN" hereafter respectively
mean object-separation and transition. Detemiination of full forward XN delay
Att is complex because it
depends on changes in spectral radiosity JA and thus on wavelength changes
rather than on changes in radiosity
J itself.
102111 Another important timing parameter is the immediately following time
duration At*, discussed
above, in which VC region 106 is in the changed state. CC duration Att.
extends from forward XN end time tie to
the instant, termed approximate return XN start time t,, at which region 106
approximately starts the return
transition from the changed state back to the normal state and IDVC portion
138 approximately starts changing
from appearing as color X to returning to appear as color A. Although usually
less important than forward XN
- 46 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
delay at, a final important timing parameter is the full return XN delay
(relaxation time) At extending from
approximate return XN start time t,, to the instant, termed approximate return
XN end time t,e, at which region
106 approximately completes the return transition and portion 138
approximately first returns to appearing as
color A.
102121 The spectral radiosity constituency, i.e., the variation of spectral
radiosity S\ with wavelength A, for a
color consists of one or wavelength bands in the visible light spectrum. Each
wavelength band may reach one
or more peak values of spectral radiosity depending on what is considered to
be a wavelength band. Referring
to Fig. 7, it illustrates an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 150 for
color light such as A or X light where
JAh is the top of the illustrated JA range. In this example, Jy, constituency
150 may be viewed as consisting of
three wavelength bands or two wavelength bands with the right-most band having
two peaks. In any event, the
wavelengths encompassed by constituency 150 lie between the low end Ai and
high end Ah of the visible
spectrum where low-end wavelength A, is nominally 380 - 400 nm and high-end
wavelength Ah is nominally 700 -
780 nm. For a spectral color, constituency 150 degenerates into a single
vertical line at the wavelength of that
color.
102131 Fig. 8 shows how an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 152,
two bands, for A light changes
with time into an exemplary spectral radiosity constituency 154, one band, for
X light during the forward
transition from the normal state to the changed state. The top portion of Fig.
8 illustrates the appearance of
color-A J,\ constituency 152 at a time tr, during the normal state and thus
prior to the forward transition. Although
color-X J,, constituency 154 does not exist at pre-transition time t), thick-
line item 154, along the wavelength axis
in the top portion of Fig. 8 indicates the expected wavelength extent of color-
X constituency 154.
102141 The middle portion of Fig. 8 depicts an exemplary intermediate
spectral radiosity constituency 156
at a time tn, during the forward transition. Intermediate J;õ constituency 156
is a combination, largely additive, of
a partial version 152,1 of color-A constituency 152 and a partial version
154,, of-color X constituency 154. The
right-most band of reduced color-A J), constituency 152,,, combined with the
dashed line extending from that
band to the right indicates how it would appear if color A were being
converted into black. Partial color-X J),
constituency 154, combined with the dashed line extending from constituency
154, to the left indicates how
constituency 154m would appear if color X were being converted from black. The
bottom portion of Fig. 8
illustrates the appearance of color-X constituency 154 at a time tc during the
changed state and thus after the
forward transition. Although color-A constituency 152 does not exist at post-
transition time t,, the two parts of
thick-line item 1520 along the wavelength axis in the bottom portion of Fig. 8
indicate the exemplary wavelength
extent of constituency 152.
102151 Forward XN delay Atf can be determined by changes in various
spectral radiosity parameters as a
function of time. Using spectral radiosity J. itself, forward delay Att is the
time for spectral radiosity J., to
decrease from (0 a high value Jmr, equal to or slightly less than the
magnitude A.I --Wiax of the difference between
- 47 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934
the maximum JA values for the color-A and color-X JA constituencies at a
wavelength present in one or both of
them, i.e., at any wavelength for which spectral radiosity J., is greater than
zero in at least one of the color A and
color-X JA constituencies, to (ii) a low value JAil equal or slightly greater
than zero.
102161 This At determination technique is most easily applied at a
wavelength present in one of the
color-A and color-X JA constituencies but not in the other. Due to noise in
experimental Jx. data, the accuracy of
the Atf determination is usually increased by choosing a wavelength at which
spectral radiosity J,), reaches a
peak value. Dotted lines 158 and 160 in each of the three portions of Fig. 8
indicate such wavelengths for J
constituencies 152 and 154. J,, maximum difference magnitude A.4rr3, is then
simply the maximum JA value for
color-A JA constituency 152 along dotted line 158 in the top portion of Fig. 8
or the maximum JA value for color-X
J,), constituency 154 along dotted line 160 in the bottom portion of Fig. 8.
The length of line 158 or 160
represents difference magnitude AJArnõ.
102171 Spectral radiosity J), can nonetheless be used to determine forward
XN delay Att at a wavelength,
indicated by dotted line 162 in each of the three portions of Fig. 8, common
to both the color-A and color-X JA
constituencies. The length of dotted line 162 represents difference magnitude
Alma. As examination of Fig. 8
indicates, difference magnitude .AJArm-a for the common-wavelength situation
is usually less than magnitude
AJAmax when the color-A JA constituency has a wavelength not in the color-X J
constituency and vice versa.
102181 High value JAfh and low value 41 are respectively slightly less than
difference magnitude AJAmax and
slightly greater than zero if OS time tos occurs after the instant, termed
actual forward XN start time 40, at which
VC region 106 actually starts the forward transition to the changed state and
IDVC portion 138 actually starts
changing to appear as color X or/and if forward XN end time tie occurs before
the instant, termed actual forward
XN end time too, at which region 106 actually completes the forward transition
to the changed state and portion
138 actually first appears as color X. In particular, high value Jmr, equals
difference magnitude J.max minus (a)
an amount, usually small, corresponding to the difference between times tos
and to if OS time tos occurs after
actual forward XN start time tto and (b) an amount, usually small,
corresponding to the difference between times
tflrio and tfe if actual forward XN end time taw ends, as usually occurs,
after approximate forward XN end time tf,.
Value Jmi, otherwise equals magnitude
102191 Low value JAfi similarly equals (a) an amount, usually small,
corresponding to the difference
between times to, and to if OS time to, occurs after actual forward XN start
time to and (b) an amount, usually
small, corresponding to the difference between times tfloo and tie if actual
forward XN end time tilt)) ends after
approximate forward XN end time tt. Value If otherwise is zero. The
modifications to values JAth and JA ii may
be so small as to not significantly affect the Atf determination and, if so,
need not be performed. If actual forward
XN start time tro occurs after OS time to,, the difference between times t10
and tra should be added to the JA-
determined value to obtain actual forward delay Atf. This modification may
likewise be so small as to not
significantly affect the Atf determination and, if so, need not be performed.
Forward XN delay At can also be
- 48 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
determined as an average of the summation of avalues determined at two or more
suitable wavelengths using
this Atf determination technique.
102201 Another spectral radiosity parameter suitable for use in determining
forward XN delay Atf is the
spectrum-integrated absolute spectral radiosity difference AJAM, basically an
integrated version of the spectral
radiosity summation Atf technique. Let J(A) and J,),x(A) respectively
represent the spectral radiosities for A and
X light as a function of wavelength A for which JA constituencies 152 and 154
are respective examples. Let
J,1(A) represent the spectral radiosity for light of wavelength of a variable
color, termed variable color M. as a
function of wavelength A such that IDVC portion 138 appears along print area
118 as color M. Each .b
constituency 152, 154, or 156 is an example of color-M spectral radiosity
Jp,m(A). Spectrum-integrated absolute
spectral radiosity difference AJ.,s,m, often simply radiosity difference AJAm,
is given by the integral:
AJAivi = fvski,x,A(A) - JAm(A)IdA (Al)
where VS indicates that the integration is performed across the visible
spectrum.
102211 An understanding of radiosity difference AJAM is facilitated with
the assistance of Fig. 9 which,
similar to Fig. 8, illustrates how example 152 of color-A spectral radiosity
J,A(A) changes into example 154 of
color-X spectral radiosity JAx(A) during the forward transition. Example 152
of color-A spectral radiosity JAA(A)
occurs at time tp. during the normal state as represented in the top portion
of Fig. 9 and is repeated in the middle
and bottom portions of Fig. 9 in doffed form because spectral radiosity JA(A)
appears in the integrand IJA,A(A)-
J,,,m(A)lof radiosity difference AJAM. At time tp, variable color M is color A
so that color M-spectral radiosity Jmo(A)
equals color A-spectral radiosity J(A). Radiosity difference AJAm is zero at
time tp.
102221 Variable color M is an intermediate color between colors A and X at
time tõ, during the forward
transition. Color-M spectral radiosity J1(A) then has a wavelength variation
between the wavelength variations
of spectral radiosities JK,s,(A) and J),x(A). Radiosity difference AJAM at
time tir, is thus at some finite value
represented by slanted-line area 164 between color-A J.x. constituency 152 and
intermediate µ1,,, constituency 156
in Fig. 9. At time tõ during the changed state, variable color M is color X so
that color-M spectral radiosity J1(A)
equals color-X spectral radiosity JAx(A). Radiosity difference AJAM at time tõ
is also at some finite value
represented by slanted-line area 166 between color-A constituency 152 and
color-X J., constituency 154 in Fig.
9. The value of radiosity difference AJAM at time tõ is usually a maximum. The
variation of radiosity difference
Lim with time thereby characterizes the forward transition.
102231 Let AJAx represent the spectrum-integrated absolute spectral
radiosity difference ivs14A(A) -
JAx(A)IdA between A and X light. Using radiosity difference AJAM, forward XN
delay Atf is the time period for
radiosity difference Lim to change from a low value equal or slightly greater
than zero to a high value equal to
or slightly less than AJAx. If OS time tes occurs after actual forward XN
start time tfo, the low AJAM value is an
amount corresponding to the difference between times to, and N. The low AJANI
value can often be taken as
zero without significantly affecting the Atf determination. If actual forward
XN start time tfo occurs after OS time
- 49 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
tõ, the difference between times tio and tõ should be added to the 4-
determined Att value to obtain actual
forward delay Att. This modification is sometimes so small as to not
significantly affect the At determination and,
if so, need not be performed. For the usual situation in which approximate
forward XN end time tto occurs before
actual forward XN end time tfico, the high AJAm value equals LIJAx minus an
amount corresponding to the
difference between times tmo and tie. The high AJAI,A value can often be taken
as AJAX without significantly
affecting the Att determination.
102241 Fig. 10 depicts how a general spectral radiosity parameter Jõ varies
with time t during a full
operational cycle in which VC region 106 goes from the normal state to the
changed state and then back to the
normal state. General radiosity parameter Jp can be spectral radiosity 4 or
spectrum-integrated absolute
spectral radiosity difference AJ.,sid. Radiosity parameter Jp varies between
zero and a maximum value J _ pmax
formed with difference Almax or the high AJAm value when parameter Jr) is
spectral radiosity JA or radiosity
difference AJAm. Curve 168 represents the Jp variation with time t.
102251 In addition to times mentioned above, the following times appear
along the time axis in Fig. 10: time
t, at which object 104 impacts OC area 116, approximate forward XN start time
tt., at which VC region 106
approximately starts the forward transition from the normal state to the
changed state and IDVC portion 138
approximately starts changing from appearing as color A to appearing as color
X, 10%, 50%, and 90% forward
XN times trio, t, and tt-i at which portion 138 has respectively changed 10%,
50%, and 90% from actually
appearing as color A to actually appearing as color X during the forward
transition, actual return XN start time to
at which region 106 actually starts the return transition back to the normal
state and portion 138 actually starts
changing from appearing as color X to returning to appear as color A, 10%,
50%, and 90% return XN times Lo,
too, and tso at which region 106 has respectively changed 100/, 50%, and 90%
from actually appearing as color
X to actually appearing as color A during the return transition, actual return
XN end time trio at which region 106
actually completes the return transition and portion 138 actually first
returns to appearing as color A, and time tr.'
during the normal state following the return transition.
102261 Using radiosity parameter Jr), 10%, 50%, and 90% forward XN times
'410, to. and t190 are instants at
which parameter J, actually respectively reaches 10%, 50%, and 90% of maximum
value Jpõ,,, during the
forward transition. 10%, 50%, and 90% return XN times tao, to, and t90 are
instants at which parameter Jp
actually has respectively decreased 10%, 50%, and 90% below value Jpõa, during
the return transition. Item
Atf50 is the 50% forward XN time delay from OS time to, to 50% forward XN time
ta during the forward transition.
Item Atff) is the 90% forward XN time delay from time to, to 90% forward XN
time to during the forward
transition. Item Atio-so is the 10%-to-90% forward XN time delay from 10%
forward XN time ttli) to time teo
during the forward transition. Item Atr50 is the 50% return XN time delay from
approximate return XN start time
t, to 50% return XN time tr,50 during the return transition. Item Atm is the
90% return XN time delay from time tr,
to 90% return XN time t90 during the return transition. Item Atr10.90 is the
10%-to-90% return XN time delay from
10% return XN time tau to time tr90 during the return transition.
- 50 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/U S2017/057934
102271 Percentage times tflOr t150, tf90, tr10, to, and to can usually be
ascertained relatively precisely
because dJo/dt, the time rate of change of radiosity parameter Jo, is
relatively high in the vicinities of those six
times, especially times to and t1f30. Conversely, times tto and trim at which
the forward transition actually
respectively starts and ends are often difficult to determine precisely
because rate dJpidt is relatively ow in their
vicinities. Times tic, and two at which the return transition actually
respectively starts and ends are likewise often
difficult to determine precisely for the same reason. In view of this, the
start and end of the forward transition are
respectively approximated by times ti s and tie which are relatively precisely
determinable utilizing time tf50.
Similarly, the start and end of the return transition are respectively
approximated by times trs and te which are
relatively precisely determinable utilizing time t150.
102281 In particular, a dotted line 170 having a slope Sf is tangent to
curve 168 at point 172 at 50% forward
XN time tf50 where radiosity parameter Jp has risen to 50% of value Jpmax.
Slope St equals rate dJpidt at time tiso
and can be determined relatively precisely. Time differences t150- tis and tie
- to each equal (.1 /2)/S
s_ PrrI3X- _f.
Forward XN start time tis and forward XN end time tfe are:
tfs tf5O- Jprnax/2S1 (A2)
tie z: tfjo Ay-flax/2Si (A3)
which can be determined relatively precisely because time tf50 can be
determined relatively precisely.
[02291 Similarly, a dotted line 174 having a slope S, is tangent to curve
168 at point 176 at 50% return XN
time tt-,-; where parameter Jp has dropped to 50% of value Jpmax. Slope Sr
equals rate dJpidt at time to and can
be determined relatively precisely. Time differences tiso - trs and tie - tr50
each equal (Jp./2)/Sr. Return XN start
time ts and return XN end time tie are:
to Jprnax/2S1 (A4)
= tr50 J pmax /2S (A5)
which can be determined relatively precisely because time to can be determined
relatively precisely.
102301 Approximate full forward XN delay Att is usually no more than 2 s,
preferably no more than 1 s,
more preferably no more than 0.5 s, even more preferably no more than 0.25 s.
50% forward XN delay AtI50 is
usually no more than .1 s, preferably no more than 0.5 s, more preferably no
more than 0.25 s, even more
preferably no more than 0.125 s. 90% forward XN delay Atf90 is usually less
than 2 s, preferably less than 1 s,
more preferably less than 0.5 s, even more preferably less than 0.25 s. The
same applies to 10%-to-90%
forward XN delay Atf1o_30.
102311 The maximum values for full return XN delay Atr, 10% return XN delay
Atm, 50% return XN delay
At150, and 90% return XN delay At190 fall into (a) a short-delay category in
which they are relatively short to avoid
impeding the activity in which object 104 is being used and (b) a long-delay
category in which they can be
relatively long without significantly impeding that activity and in which
their greater lengths can sometimes lead
- 51 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934
to reduction in the cost of manufacturing 01 structure 130. For the short-
delay category, return XN delays At,
Atrio, At, and Atrx have the same usual and preferred maximum values
respectively as forward XN delays Ati,
AtfiO, Atrso, and Atm. Return XN delays dtr, Moo, Atr50, and to have the
following maximum values for the
long-delay category. Delay /It is usually no more than 10 s, preferably no
more than 5 s. Delay At150 is usually
no more than 5 s, preferably no more than 2.5 s. Delay At,9r) is usually less
than 10 s, preferably less than 5 s.
The same applies to delay Atflo_so.
102321 CC duration At*, the difference between return XN start time tr, and
forward XN end time tt,,, is:
Atdr tr5 tfe Orrao ""---jr)nla)( \ - V 1 ) f50 -
2S; '
tr50 450 Cpmax)
(A6)
2 Uf Sr)
which likewise can be determined relatively precisely because times tf5r) and
tr5r) can both be determined
relatively precisely.
102331 Fig. 10 depicts the preferred situation in which OS time t. occurs
after actual forward XN start time
to. Forward XN start time tto can, however, occur after OS time to,. If so,
between times to, and tfo, there is a
delay in which radiosity parameter Jp is zero. Fig. 10 depicts the situation
in which approximate forward XN start
time tts occurs after OS time tc,. Forward XN start time tf, preferably occurs
before OS time tos.
102341 The actual total time period Attot,,,t (not indicated in Fig. 10)
from actual forward XN start time tfo to
actual return XN end time t000 is difficult to determine precisely because
times tfo and t, 100 are difficult to
determine precisely. Additionally, OS time to, may as mentioned above occur
after forward XN stat time to. If
so, the short interval between times tp.) and tos is insignificant practically
because object 104 blocks print area
118 from then being visible. Approximate return XN end time te is highly
representative of when area 118
returns to appearing as principal color A. A useful parameter for dealing with
the time period needed to switch
from the normal state to the changed state and back to the normal state is the
effective total time period Attoteff
(also not indicated in Fig. 10) from OS time trõ to return XN end time tr,.
102351 The time period between points in high-level tennis is seldom less
than 15 s. If print area 118
generated during a point due to impact of a tennis ball embodying object 104
is desirably not present during the
immediately subsequent point, effective total time period Attoteri can be
chosen to be no more than 15 s. Area
118 caused by a tennis ball during a point will then automatically not be
present during the immediately
subsequent point in the vast majority of consecutive-point instances. With
full forward XN delay Atr and full
return XN delay Atr each being no more than 1 s, automatic value Atji, of CC
duration At is chosen to be close
to, but less than, 15 s, e.g., usually at least 10 s, preferably at least 12
s. These /ltd13 values should almost
always provide sufficient time to examine area 118 and either immediately
determine whether the ball is "in" or
"out" or, if possible, extend duration Atdr to examine area 118 more closely.
- 52 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
102361 Non-lobbed groundstrokes hit by highly skilled tennis players
typically take roughly 2 s to travel
from one baseline to the other baseline and back to the initial baseline. The
presence of two or more print areas
118 created during a point is not expected to be significantly distracting to
the players. Also, the likelihood of
two such areas 118 at least partly overlapping is very low. Nonetheless, if
only one area 118 is desirably
present at any time during a point, effective total time period Attaht can be
chosen to be approximately 2 s. By
arranging for each XN delay Att or At to be no more than 0.25 s, automatic
duration value Atd,,õ is at least 1.5 S.
This should usually give the players and any associated tennis official(s)
enough time to make an immediate
in/out determination or, if possible, extend CC duration Atir for more closely
examining area 118. In addition,
automatic value Atir, can more closely approach 2 s by configuring VC region
106 as described below for Figs.
11a- 11c.
102371 Two colors differ materially if the standard human eyes/brain can
essentially instantaneously clearly
distinguish the two colors when one of them rapidly replaces the other or when
they appear adjacent to each
other. Hence, colors A and X differ materially if the standard human eye/brain
can essentially instantaneously
identify print area 118 when it changes from principal color A to changed
color X. If object 104 simultaneously
impacts both VC SF zone 112 and FC SF zone 114 in an embodiment of 01
structure 100 where secondary
color A of zone 114 is the same as color A, colors A and X also differ
materially if the standard human eye/brain
can essentially instantaneously determine that object 104 has impacted both of
zones 112 and 114 due to the
difference in color between area 118 and zone 114.
102381 What constitutes a material difference between colors A and X can
sometimes be numerically
quantified. In this regard, colors A and X occur in the all-color CIE Vat*
color space in which a color is
characterized by a dimensionless lightness L*, a dimensionless green/red hue
parameter a*, and a
dimensionless blue/yellow hue parameter b*. Lightness V varies from 0 to 100
where a low number indicates
dark and a high number indicates light. L* values of 0 and 100 respectively
indicate black and white regardless
of the a* and b* values. Hue parameters a* and b* have no numerical limits but
typically range from a negative
value as low as -128 to a positive value as high as 127. For green/red
parameter a*, a negative number
indicates green and a positive number indicates red. A negative number for
blue/yellow parameter indicates
blue while a positive number indicates yellow. Colors of particular hues
determined by hue parameters a* and
b* become lighter as lightness V increases so that the colors contain more
white and darker as lighter as
lightness L* decreases so that they contain more black.
102391 Hoffmann, "CIE Lab Color Space", docs-
hoffmann.deicie1ab03022003.pdf, 10 Feb. 2013, 63 pp.,
contents incorporated by reference herein, presents the sRGB and AdobeRGB,
subspaces of the CIE L*a*b*
color space for Utvalues of 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, and 90. For the
same L* value, the sRGB and
AdobeRGB color subspaces are identical where they overlap. The following
material for numerically quantifying
how color X differs materially from color A uses the sRGB or AdobeRGB subspace
as a baseline for applying
the numerical quantification to the full CIE L*a*b* space.
- 53 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
102401 Colors A and X have respective lightnesses LA* and Lx*, respective
green/red parameters aA* and
ax*, and respective blue/yellow parameters bA* and bx* whose values are
restricted so that color X differs
materially from color A. In a first general L*a*b* restriction embodiment,
suitable minimum and maximum limits
are placed on one or more of lightness pair LA* and Lx*, red/green parameter
pair aA* and ax*, and blue/yellow
parameter pair bA* and bx* to define one or more pairs of mutually exclusive
(non-overlapping) color regions for
which any color in one of a pair of the color regions differs materially from
any color in the other of that pair of
color regions. Any color in one of each pair of the color regions embodies
color A while any color in the other of
that pair of color regions embodies color X and vice versa.
102411 The color regions in one such pair of mutually exclusive color
regions consist of a light region
containing a selected one of colors A and X and a dark region containing the
remaining one of colors A and X.
Lightness LA* or Lx* of selected color A or X in the light region is at least
60 greater than lightness Lx* or LA* of
remaining color X or A in the dark region. Selected-color lightness LA* or Lx*
ranges from a minimum of 60 up to
100 while remaining-color lightness Lx* or LA* ranges from 0 to a maximum of
40 provided that lightnesses LA*
and Lys' differ by at least 60. Selected color A or X is a light color while
remaining color X or A is a dark color.
Each color A or X can be at any values of parameters aA* and bA* or ax* and
bx*. Lightness difference AL*, i.e.,
the magnitude ILX* - LA*I of the difference between lightnesses Lx* and LA*,
is at least 60, preferably at least 70,
often at least 80, sometimes at least 90.
102421 Let Aa* represent the magnitude lax* - aA*I of the difference
between green/red parameters ax* and
aA*, tib* represent the magnitude Ibx' - bA*I of the difference between
blue/yellow parameters bx* and bA*, and
CAW represent the weighted color difference (CiAL*2 + C3AaA2 + Q,Ab*2)"2 where
CL. Ca, and Cb are non-
negative weighting constants usually ranging from 0 to 1 but potentially as
high as 9. Limits, almost invariably
minimum limits, are placed on one or more of differences AL*, Aa*, Ab*, and
IIIN* in a second general L*a*b*
restriction embodiment such that color X differs materially from color A. In
one example, each difference AL* or
Aa* is at least 50. Each parameter bA* or bx* can be at any value. Hence, no
minimum limit is placed on
difference Ab*. Weighted color difference AW* is not used in this example.
102431 Weighted color difference AW* can, in other examples, be used (i)
alone since differences AL*,
Aa*, and Ab* appear in the AW* formula (CLAL*2 +C,Aa*2 + Cr,Ab*2)1,2 or (ii)
in combination with one or more of
differences AL*, Aa*, and Ab*. In either case, color difference CAW is greater
than or equal to a threshold
weighted difference value AW*. When used alone, threshold weighted difference
value AWthis sufficiently high
that colors A and X materially differ for all pairs of LA*and Lx* values, aA.*
and ax* values, and bA* and by,* values.
Examination of the sRGB or AdobeRGB I.* examples in Hoffmann indicates that
color differences are more
pronounced in green/red parameter a* than in blue/yellow parameter b*. In view
of this, one of constants CL and
Ca in the AW* formula is sometimes greater than constant Cb while the other of
constants CL and Ca in the CAW
formula is greater than or equal to constant C. Constants CL and C, for this
situation are typically 1 with
constant Ch being 0.
- 54 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
102441 A third general L*a*b* restriction embodiment combines placing
limits on one or more of lightnesses
LA* and Lx*, red/green parameters aA* and ax*, and blue/yellow parameters bA*
and bx* with placing limits on
one or more of differences AL*, Aa*, Ab*, and AVV* such that color X differs
materially from color A. In one
example, lightness LA* or Lx* of each color A or X is at least 50 while
red/green parameter difference Aa* is at
least 70. No limitation is placed on parameter aA*, ax*, bA*, or bx*,
lightness difference AL*, or blue/yellow
parameter difference AbA in this example.
102451 Specific examples of pairs of materially different colors suitable
for colors A and X, including some
pairs covered in the three general Va*b* restriction embodiments, include: (a)
white and a non-white color
having an L* value of no more than 80, preferably no more than 70: (b) an off-
white color having an V value of
at least 95 and a darker color having an V value of no more than 75,
preferably no more than 65; (c) a reddish
color having an a* value of at least 20, preferably at least 30, and a
greenish color having an a* value of no more
than -20, preferably no more than -30, each color having an V value of at
least 30, preferably at least 40: and
(d) a reddish color having a b* value of at least 75 plus 1.6 times its a*
value and a bluish color having a b* value
of -10 minus 1.0 times its a* value, each color having an L* value of at least
30, preferably at least 40.
Numerous other pairs of materially different colors, including numerous pairs
of light and dark colors, are
suitable for colors A and X.
102461 Colors A and X often have different average wavelengths Aõg. In
terms of spectral radiosity JA, the
average wavelength A3 of of light of a particular color is:
f AJAQMA
Avg _ VS (A7)
fvs JA(A)dA
Average wavelength Aõ, is zero for black and approximately 550 nm for white.
The ratio R,,3iq of the difference
between the average wavelengths of X and A light to the average of their
average wavelengths is:
214vgX AavgAl
RAavg (A8)
AavgX AavgA
where Aõgx and 11/4õ,gA respectively are the average wavelengths of X and A
light as determined from the Aa.0
relationship. In some embodiments of 01 structure 100, wavelength difference-
to-average ratio RAavg is at least
0.06, preferably at least 0.08, more preferably at least 0.10, even more
preferably at least 0.12.
Object-impact Structure Having Variable-color Region Formed with Impact-
sensitive Changeably Reflective or
Changeably Emissive Material
102471 1SCC structure 132 can be embodied in many ways. Structure 132 is
sometimes basically a single
material consisting of impact-sensitive changeably reflective or changeably
emissive material where
"changeably reflective" means that color change occurs primarily due to change
in light reflection (and
- 55 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
associated light absorption) and where "changeably emissive" means that color
change occurs primarily due to
change in light emission. "CR" and "CE" hereafter respectively mean changeably
reflective and changeably
emissive.
102481 First consider ISCC structure 132 consisting solely of impact-
sensitive CR material. "IS" hereafter
means impact-sensitive. During the normal state, CR ISCC structure 132
reflects ARic light striking SF zone
112. No significant amount of light is normally emitted by structure .132.
Including any ARsb light passing
through structure 132, A light is formed with ARic light and any ARsb light
normally leaving structure 132, and
thus VC region 106, via zone 112.
102491 The IS CR material forming ISCC segment 142 temporarily reflects
XRic light striking print area 118
in response to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH impact
criteria. As in the normal state,
CR ISCC segment 142 does not emit any significant amount of light during the
changed state. Including any
XRsb light passing through segment 142, X light is formed with XRic light and
any XRsb light temporarily leaving
segment 142, and thus IDVC portion 138, via area 118.
102501 The mechanism causing CR ISCC segment 142 to temporarily reflect
XRic light is pressure or/and
deformation at OC area 116 or/and SF DF area 122 due to the impact. The IS CR
material is typically
piezochromic material which temporarily changes color when subjected to a
change in pressure, here at print
area 118. Examples of piezochromic material are described in Fukuda, inorganic
Chromotropistn: Basic
Concepts and Applications of Colored Materials (Springer), 2007, pp. 28 - 32,
37, 38, and 199 - 238, and the
references cited on those pages, contents incorporated by reference herein.
102511 When ISCC structure 132 consists solely of impact-sensitive CE
material, CE ISCC structure 132
may or may not significantly emit AEic light during the normal state.
Structure 132 normally reflects ARic light
striking SF zone 112. Including any ARsb light passing through structure 132,
A light is formed with ARic light
and any AEic and ARsb light normally leaving structure 132, and thus VC region
106, via zone 112.
102521 The IS CE material forming ISCC segment 142 temporarily emits XEic
light in response to the
impact so as to meet the TH impact criteria. During the changed state, CE ISCC
segment 142 usually reflects
ARic light striking print area 118. Including any XRsb light passing through
segment 142, X light is formed with
XEic and ARic light and any XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 142, and
thus IDVC portion 138, via area
118. Alternatively, the temporary emission of XEic light may so affect segment
142 that it temporarily largely
ceases to reflect ARic light striking area 118 and, instead, temporarily
reflects XRic light materially different from
ARic light. X light is now formed with XEic and XRic light and any XRsb light
temporarily leaving segment 142,
and therefore portion .138, via area 118.
102531 The mechanism causing CE ISCC segment 142 to temporarily emit XEic
light is pressure or/and
deformation at SF DF area 122 due to the impact. If there normally is no
significant AEic light, the IS CE
material is typically piezolurninescent material which temporarily emits light
(luminesces) upon being subjected
- 56 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/U S2017/(157934
to a change in pressure, here at print area 118. Examples of piezoluminescent
material are presented in
"Piezoluminescence", Wikipedia, en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Piezoluminescence, 16
Mar. 2013, 1 p., and the
references cited therein, contents incorporated by reference herein. If there
normally is significant AEic light, the
IS CE material is typically piezochromic luminescent material which
continuously emits light whose color
changes when subjected to a change in pressure, again here at area 118.
102541 CC duration iltd, is usually automatic value Atdr,i, formed by base
portion Atdrt), passively
determined by the properties of the IS CR or CE material. VC region 106 may
contain componentry, described
below, which excites the CR or CE material so as to automatically extend
automatic value Atd,a,) by amount
LltdFext beyond base duration ttbs.
Object-impact Structure Having Separate Impact-sensitive and Color-change
Components
102551 VC region 106 often contains multiple subregions stacked one over
another up to SF zone 112. A
recitation that light of a particular species, i.e., light identified by one
or more alphabetic or alphanumeric
characters, leaves a specified one of these subregions mean that the light
leaves the specified subregion along
zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or, if the specified
subregion adjoins another subregion
lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along the adjoining
subregion, i.e., via the interface
between the two subregions. A recitation that light of a particular species
leaves a segment or part of the
specified subregion similarly mean that the light leaves that segment or
subregion part along the corresponding
segment or part of zone 112 if the specified subregion extends to zone 112 or,
if the specified subregion adjoins
another subregion lying between the specified subregion and zone 112, along
the corresponding segment or
part of the adjoining subregion, i.e., via the corresponding segment or part
of the interface between the two
subregions.
102561 Figs. 11a - 11c (collectively "Fig. 11") illustrate an embodiment
180 of 01 structure 130 in which VC
region 106 is again formed solely with ISCC structure 132. Region 106, and
thus structure 132, here consists of
a principal IS component 182 and a principal CC component 184 that meet at a
flat principal light-transmission
interface 186 extending parallel to SF zone 112 and interface 136. See Fig.
11a. IS component 182 extends
between zone 112 and interface 186. CC component 184 extends between
interfaces 186 and 136 and
therefore between IS component 182 and substructure 134.
102571 Light travels through IS component 182, usually transparent, from SF
zone 112 to interface 186
and vice versa. Preferably, largely no light striking CC component 184 along
interface 186 passes fully through
component 184 to interface 136. All light striking component 184 along
interface 186 is preferably absorbed
and/or reflected by component 184 so that there is no substructure-reflected
ARsb or XRsb light.
102581 Light, termed ADoc light, normally leaves CC component 184 after
being reflected or/and emitted
by it during. ADcc light, which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a)
light, termed ARcc light, normally
- 57 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
reflected by component 184 so as to leave it via interface 186 after striking
SF zone 112 and passing through IS
component 182 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcc light, normally emitted by
component 184 so as to leave it via
interface 186. Reflected ARcc light which is of wavelength for a normal
reflected main color ARcc is invariably
always present. Emitted AEcc light which is of wavelength for a normal emitted
main color AEcc may or may not
be present.
102591 Any ARsb light passes in substantial part through CC component 184.
The total light, termed ATcc
light, normally leaving component 184 (along IS component 182) consists of
ARcc light, any AEcc light, and any
ARsb light leaving component 184. Substantial parts of the ARcc light, any
AEcc light, and any ARsb light pass
through IS component 182. In addition, component 182 may normally reflect
light, termed ARis light, which
leaves it via SF zone 112 after striking zone 112. A light is formed with ARcc
light, any AEcc light, and any ARis
and ARsb light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106. Each of
ADcc light and either ARcc or
AEcc light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority
component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of A and ADic light.
102601 Referring to Figs. 11b and 11c, item 192 is the ID segment of IS
component 182 present in IDVC
portion 138. Print area 118 is the upper surface of ID segment 192. Item 194
is the underlying ID segment of
CC component 184 present in portion 138. Item 196 is the ID segment of
interface 186 present in portion 138.
"IF" hereafter means interface. Component segments 192 and 194, respectively
termed IS and CC segments,
meet along segment 196 of interface 186.
102611 Responsive to object 104 impacting OC area 116 so as to meet the TH
impact criteria, ID IS
segment 192 provides a principal general ID impact effect usually resulting
from the pressure of the impact on
area 116 or from deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF area 122. The
general ID impact effect is
typically an electrical effect consisting of one or more electrical signals
but can be in other form depending on
the configuration and operation of IS component 182. IS segment 192 can
generate the impact effect
piezoelectrically as described below for Figs. 24a, 24b, 25a, and 25b or using
a resistive touchscreen technique.
102621 The general impact effect is furnished directly to CC component 184,
specifically to ID CC segment
194, in some general 01 embodiments. If so or if component 184, likewise
specifically segment 194, in other
general 01 embodiments is provided with the general CC control signal
generated in response to the impact
effect for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria sometimes dependent
on other impact criteria also
being met in those other embodiments as described below, CC segment 194
responds to the effect or to the
control signal by changing in such a way that light, termed XDoc light,
temporarily leaves segment 194 after
being reflected or/and emitted by it as VC region 106 goes to the changed
state. XDcc light, which excludes any
XRsb light, consists of (a) light, termed XRcc light, temporarily reflected by
segment 194 so as to leave it via ID
IF segment 196 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment
192 and (b) light (if any), termed
XEcc light, temporarily emitted by CC segment 194 so as to leave it via IF
segment 196. Reflected XRcc light
- 58 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
which is of wavelength for a temporary reflected main color XRcc is invariably
always present. Emitted XEcc
light which is of wavelength for a temporary emitted main color XEcc may or
may not be present.
10263] Any XRsb light passes in substantial part through CC segment 194.
The total light, termed XTec
light, temporarily leaving segment 194 (along IS segment 192) consists of XRcc
light, any XEcc light, and any
XRsb light leaving segment 194. Substantial parts of the XRcc light, any XEcc
light, and any XRsb light pass
through IS segment 192. Since IS component 182 may reflect ARis light during
the normal state, segment 192
may reflect ARis light which leaves it via print area 118 during the changed
state. X light is formed with XRcc
light, any XEcc light, and any ARis and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and
thus IDVC portion 138. XDoc light
differs materially from A, ADic, and ADcc light. Each of XDcc light and either
XRcc or XEcc light is usually a
majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each
of X and XDic light.
102641 If the basic TH impact criteria consist of multiple sets (Si- Sn) of
different principal basic TH impact
criteria respectively associated with multiple specific changed colors (Xi -
Xr) materially different from principal
color A. the principal general impact effect consists of one of multiple
different principal specific impact effects
respectively corresponding to the specific changed colors. IS component 182,
specifically IS segment 192,
provides the general impact effect as the specific impact effect for the basic
TH criteria set (Si) met by the
impact. CC component 184, specifically CC segment 194, responds (a) in some
general 01 embodiments to
that specific impact effect or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the
general CC control signal then
generated in response to that specific effect sometimes dependent on the above-
mentioned other impact criteria
also being met in those other embodiments, by causing IDVC portion 138 to
appear as the specific changed
color (X) for that criteria set. The control signal may, for example, be
generatable at multiple control conditions
respectively associated with the criteria sets. The control signal is then
actually generated at the control
condition for the criteria set met by the impact.
102651 X light advantageously generally becomes more distinct from A light
as the ratio RAReADõ of the
radiosity of ARis light leaving IS component 182 during the normal state to
the radiosity of ADcc light leaving
component 182 during the normal state decreases and as the ratio RAF=deXpcx of
the radiosity of ARis light leaving
IS segment 192 during the changed state to the radiosity of XDoc light leaving
segment 192 during the changed
state likewise decreases. The radiosity of ARis light during the normal and
changed states is usually made as
small as reasonably feasible. The sum of radiosity ratios RARis/ADõ and
RARisjynõ is usually no more than 0.4,
preferably no more than 0.3, more preferably no more than 0.2, even more
preferably no more than 0.1.
102661 Performing the impact-sensing and color-changing operations with
separate components 182 and
184 provides many benefits. More materials are capable of separately
performing the impact-sensing and color-
changing operations than of jointly performing those operations. As a result,
the ambit of colors for embodying
colors A and X is increased. Different shades of the embodiments of colors A
and X existent in the absence of
- 59 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
ARis light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of IS
component 182, specifically the
wavelength and intensity characteristics of ARis light, without changing CC
component 184. Print area 118 can
be even better matched to OC area 116. The ruggedness, especially the ability
to successfully withstand
impacts, is enhanced. Consequently, the lifetime can be increased.
102671 The ability to select and control the CC timing, both CC duration
Ltd, and the XN delays, is
improved. Full forward XN delay titf can be as high as 0.4s, sometimes as high
as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is
usually reduced to no more than 0.2 s, preferably no more than 0.1 s, more
preferably no more than 0.05 s,
even more preferably no more than 0.025 s. 50% forward XN delay Atf50
correspondingly can be as high as 0.2
s, sometimes as high as 0.3, 0.4, or 0.5 s but is usually reduced to no more
than 0.1 s, preferably no more than
0.05 s, more preferably no more than 0.025 s, even more preferably no more
than 0.0125 s. These low
maximum usual and preferred values for delays Atf and to are highly
advantageous when the activity is a sport
such as tennis in which players and any official(s) need to make quick
decisions on the impact locations of a
tennis ball embodying object 104.
102681 The last 10% of the actual print-area transition from color A to
color X is comparatively long in some
embodiments of 01 structure 180. As a resutt, the time period from OS time tos
to actual forward XN end time
tfloo is considerably greater than approximate full forward delay Att. See
Fig. 10. In such embodiments, the
comparatively long duration of the last 10% of the A-to-X transition is
generally not significant because a person
viewing surface 102 can usually readily identify print area 118 when it is
close to, but not exactly, color X. In
view of these considerations, 90% forward XN delay Attic; and 10%-to-90%
forward XN delay Atti0-90 are
important timing parameters. Since 90% forward delay /490 starts at OS time
to., whereas 10%-to-90% forward
delay Atiio_T starts at 10% forward XN time tfio, delay Atf90 can be greater
than or less than delay Atfio_T
depending on whether OS time to, occurs before or after 10% forward XN time
tt. By forming ISCC structure
132 with components 182 and 184, especially when CC component 184 is
configured as described below for
Figs. 12a - 12c, each delay Atf90 or Attio_90 can be as high as 0.4 s,
sometimes as high as 0.6, 0.8, or 1.0 s but is
usually less than 0.2 s, preferably less than 0.1 s, more preferably less than
0.05 s, even more preferably less
than 0.025 s. This is likewise particularly advantageous when the activity is
a sport such as tennis in which
quick decisions are needed on tennis-ball impact locations.
102691 OC duration although usually quite small, can be long enough that
90% forward XN time trx,
occurs before OS time tõ when ISCC structure 132 is formed with components 182
and 184. If so, 90% forward
XN delay Atf90 and 10%-to-90% forward XN delay Atf10.90 become zero. Also,
approximate forward XN end time
tie may occur before OS time 6. If so, full forward delay /,:tf drops to zero.
50% forward XN delay Ati50 also
drops to zero and, in fact, becomes zero whenever time tfso occurs before OS
time tos.
102701 A consequence of the reduced maximum At, Atiso, Atf90, and Attio-90
values arising from forming
ISCC structure 132 with components 182 and 184 is that return XN delays Atr,
Atm, Atm, and Atfio-so are
- 60 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
reduced. Approximate full return XN delay Atr usually has the same reduced
maximum values as full forward
delay Att. 50% return XN delay At150 usually has the same reduced maximum
values as 50% forward delay Att5Ø
90% return XN delay At-90 and 10%-to-90% return XN delay At110_90 usually have
the same reduced maximum
values as forward delays Atm and Atf10-90.
102711 The general impact effect can be transmitted outside VC region 106.
For instance, the effect can
take the form of a general location-identifying impact signal supplied to a
separate general CC duration
controller as described below for Figs. 54a and 54b or a characteristics-
identifying impact signal supplied to a
separate general intelligent CC controller as described below for Figs. 64a
and 64b. The effect can also take
the form of multiple cellular location-identifying impact signals supplied to
a separate cell CC duration controller
as described below for Figs. 59a and 59b or multiple characteristics-
identifying impact signals supplied to a
separate intelligent cell CC controller as described below for Figs. 69a and
69b. When a duration controller is
used, the effect is also provided to ID portion 138, or is converted into the
general CC control signal provided to
portion 138, for producing a color change at print area 118. However, the
effect is not provided to portion 138 or
always converted into the control signal when an intelligent controller is
used. Instead, the intelligent controller
makes a decision to provide, or not provide, portion 138 with a CC initiation
signal which implements, or leads to
the generation of, the control signal that produces a color change at area
.118.
102721 The positions of components 182 and 184 can sometimes be reversed so
that IS component 182
extends between CC component 184 and substructure 134. SF zone 112 is then the
upper surface of
component 184. Components 182 and 184 still meet at interface 186. In this
reversal, the pressure of the
impact on OC area 116 or the deformation that object 104 causes along SF DF
area 122 is transmitted
pressure-wise through component 184 to produce excess internal pressure atIF
segment 196. IS segment 192
responds to the excess internal pressure at IF segment 196, and thus to object
104 impacting OC area 116 so
as to meet excess internal pressure criteria that embody the TH impact
criteria, by providing the general impact
effect supplied to CC segment 194 or/and outside VC region 106 for potential
generation of the general CC
control signal.
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Changeably
Reflective or Changeably
Emissive Color-change Component
102731 CC component 184 in 01 structure 180 can be embodied in various ways
to perform the CC
function in accordance with the invention. In one group of embodiments, the
core of the mechanism used to
achieve color changing is light reflection (and associated light absorption).
Component 184 in these
embodiments is, for simplicity, termed "CR component 184" where "CR" again
means changeably reflective.
Light emission is the core of the mechanism used to achieve color changing in
another group of embodiments.
- 61 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
Component 184 in these other embodiments is termed "CE component 184" where
"CE" again means
changeably emissive.
102741 Beginning with CR component 184, no significant amount of light is
emitted by it so as to leave it
during the normal or changed state. Starting with the normal state, CR
component 184 normally reflects ARcc
light which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Normal
reflected main color ARcc may be
termed the first reflected main color. Including any ARis light normally
reflected by IS component 182 and any
ARsb light passing through it, A light is formed with ARcc light and any ARis
and ARsb light normally leaving
component 182 and thus VC region 106. ARcc light, a reflective implementation
of ADcc light here, is usually a
majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of A
light.
102751 Responsive (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact
effect for the impact
meeting the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to
the general CC control signal
generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact
criteria also being met in those other
embodiments, ID segment 194 of CR component 184 temporarily reflects XRcc
light, materially different from
ARcc light, which passes in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the
changed state. Temporary
reflected main color XRcc may be termed the second reflected main color. If IS
component 182 normally
reflects ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light. Including
any XRsb light passing through
segment 192, X light is formed with XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb light
leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138. XRcc light, a reflective implementation of XDcc light here, is
usually a majority component,
preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component,
of X light.
102761 CR component 184 is an electrochromic structure or a photonic
crystal structure in a basic
embodiment An electrochromic structure contains electrochromic material which
temporarily changes color
upon undergoing a change in electronic state, such as a change in charge
condition resulting from a change in
electric field across the material, in response to an electrical-effect
implementation of the general impact effect
provided by IS segment 192. Examples of electrochromic material are described
in Fukuda, Inorganic
Chromotropistn: Basic Concepts and Applications of Colored Materials
(Springer), 2007, pp. 34 - 38 and 291 -
336, and the references cited on those pages, contents incorporated by
reference herein. Alternatively, CR
component 184 is one or more of the following light-processing structures in
which the light processing generally
involves reflecting light off particles: a dipolar suspension structure, an
electrofluidic structure, an electrophoretic
structure, and an electrowelling structure. CR component 184 may also be a
reflective liquid-crystal structure or
a reflective microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure such as an
interferometric modulator structure
or a transflective digital micro shutter structure.
- 62 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[02771 CE component 184 can be embodied to operate in either of two modes
termed the single-emission
and double-emission modes. These two embodiments of CE component 184 are
respectively termed single-
emission CE component 184 and double-emission CE component 184.
102781 For single-emission CE component 184, the normal and changed states
of VC region 106 can be
respectively designated as non-emissive and emissive states because
significant light emission occurs during
the changed state but not during the normal state. Single-emission CE
component 184 operates the same
during the normal (non-emissive) state as CR component 184.
102791 Responsive (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general impact
effect for the impact
meeting the TH impact criteria or (b) in other general 01 embodiments to the
general CC control signal
generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact
criteria also being met in those other
embodiments, ID segment 194 of single-emission CE component 184 temporarily
emits XEcc light which passes
in substantial part through IS segment 192 during the changed (emissive)
state. CC segment 194 usually
continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. XEcc and ARcc light
form XDcc light. Since IS component 182 may normally reflect ARis light,
segment 192 may reflect ARis light.
Including any XRsb light passing through segment 192, X light is formed with
XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis
and XRsb light leaving segment 192 and thus 1DVC portion 138. XEcc tight, an
emissive component of XDcc
light here, differs materially from A, ADic, ADcc, and ARcc light. Either XEcc
or ARcc light is usually a majority
component of X light.
102801 Alternatively, the emission of XEcc light may so affect CC segment
194 of single-emission CE
component 184 during the changed state that segment 194 ceases to reflect ARcc
light and, instead, temporarily
reflects XRcc light significantly different from ARcc light The XRcc light
passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. XEcc and XRcc light now form XDcc light The processing of any
ARis and XRsb light is the
same. X light is then formed with XEcc and XRcc light and any ARis and XRsb
light leaving segment 192 and
thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or XRcc light is usually a majority
component of X light.
102811 Turning to double-emission CE component 184, the normal and changed
states of VC region 106
can be respectively designated as first emissive and second emissive states
because significant light emission
occurs during both the normal and changed states. Double-emission CE component
184 operates as follows
during the normal (first emissive) state. For the normal state, CE component
184 normally emits AEcc light
which passes in substantial part through IS component 182. Normal emitted main
color AEcc may be termed
the first emitted main color. CE component 184 usually normally reflects ARcc
light which passes in substantial
part through IS component 182. Including any ARis light normally reflected by
component 182 and any ARsb
light passing through it, A light is formed with AEcc and ARcc light and any
ARis and ARsb light normally leaving
component 182 and thus VC region 106. Either AEcc or ARcc light is usually a
majority component of A light.
- 63 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
10282] Double-emission CE component 184 responds, during the changed
(second emissive) state, (a) in
some general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect for the impact
meeting the TH impact criteria or (b) in
other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in
response to the effect sometimes
dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments
basically the same as single-
emission CE component 184 responds during the changed (emissive) state. In
particular, ID segment 194 of
double-emission CE component 184 temporarily emits XEcc light which passes in
substantial part through IS
segment 192. Temporary emitted main color XEcc, which may be termed the second
emitted main color, differs
materially from normal (or first) emitted main color AEcc. CC segment 194 can
implement this change by
ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc light or by ceasing to
emit one or more components, but
not all, of AEcc light, potentially accompanied by emitting additional light.
102831 During the changed state, ID segment 194 of double-emission CE
component 184 usually
continues to reflect ARcc light which passes in substantial part through IS
segment 192. Since IS component
182 may normally reflect ARis light, segment 192 may again reflect ARis light.
Including any XRsb light passing
through segment 192, X light is formed with XEcc and ARcc light and any ARis
and XRsb light leaving segment
192 and thus IDVC portion 138. Either XEcc or ARcc light is usually a majority
component of X light.
102841 Alternatively, the emission of XEcc light may so affect ID segment
194 of double-emission CE
component 184 that CC segment 194 temporarily ceases to reflect ARcc light and
instead temporarily reflects
XRcc light which passes through IS segment 192. Subject to segment 194
changing from emitting AEcc light to
emitting XEcc light by ceasing to emit AEcc light and replacing it with XEcc
light or by ceasing to emit one or
more components, but not all, of AEcc light, possibly accompanied by emitting
additional light, the operation of
double-emission CE component 184 during the changed state in this alternative
is the same as that of single-
emission CE component 184 during the changed state in the corresponding
alternative.
102851 Both the single-emission and double-emission embodiments of CE
component 184 are
advantageous because use of light emission to produce changed color X enables
print area 118 to be quite
bright, thereby enhancing visibility of the color change. CE component 184,
either embodiment, may variously
be one or more of the following light-processing structures that emit light: a
backlit liquid-crystal structure, a
cathodoluminescent structure, a digital light processing structure, an
electrochromic fluorescent structure, an
electrochromic luminescent structure, an electrochromic phosphorescent
structure, an electroluminescent
structure, an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem (display) structure
(such as a time-multiplexed optical
shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter structure), a field-emission
structure, a laser phosphor (display)
structure, a light-emitting diode structure, a light-emitting electrochemical
cell structure, a liquid-crystal-over-
silicon structure, an organic fight-emitting diode structure, an organic light-
emitting transistor structure, a
photoluminescent structure, a plasma panel structure, a quantum-dot light-
emitting diode structure, a surface-
conduction-emission structure, a telescopic pixel (display) structure, and a
vacuum fluorescent (display)
- 64 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
structure. Organic light-emitting diode structures are of particular interest
because they provide bendability for
impact resistance.
102861 The above-described situation in which the positions of components
182 and 184 are reversed is
particularly suitable for embodying CC component 184 as a CR CC component,
especially an electrochromic or
photonic crystal structure, or a CE CC component, especially an electrochromic
fluorescent, electrochromic
luminescent, electrochromic phosphorescent structure, or electroluminescent
structure.
Object-impact Structure Having Impact-sensitive Component and Color-change
Component that Utilizes
Electrode Assembly
102871 Figs. 12a - 12c (collectively "Fig. 12") illustrate an embodiment
200 of 01 structure 180 and thus of
01 structure 130. CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 consists of a principal
electrode assembly 202, an
optional principal near (first) auxiliary layer 204 extending between
electrode assembly 202 and interface 186 to
meet IS component 182, and an optional principal far (second) auxiliary layer
206 extending between assembly
202 and substructure 134. See Fig. 12a. The adjectives "near" and "far" are
used to differentiate near auxiliary
layer 204 and far auxiliary layer 206 relative to their distances from SF zone
112, far auxiliary layer 206 being
farther from zone 112 than near auxiliary layer 204. "NA" and "FA" hereafter
respectively mean near auxiliary
and far auxiliary. Assembly 202, NA layer 204, and FA layer and 206 all
usually extend parallel to one another
and parallel to zone 112 and interface 136.
102881 NA layer 204, if present, usually contains insulating material for
isolating IS component 182 and
assembly 202 from each other as necessary. FA layer 206, if present, usually
contains insulating material for
appropriately isolating assembly 202 from substructure 134 as desired.
Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may
perform other functions. Electrical conductors may be incorporated into NA
layer 204 for electrically connecting
selected parts of component 182 to selected parts of assembly 202. If VC
region 106, potentially in combination
with FC region 108, is manufactured as a separate unit and later installed on
substructure 134, FA layer 206
protects assembly 202 during the time between manufacture of the unit and its
installation on substructure 134.
In some liquid-crystal embodiments of CC component 184, NA layer 204 includes
a polarizer while FA layer 206
includes a polarizer and either a light reflector or a light emitter.
102891 Light travels from interface 186 through NA layer 204, usually
transparent, to assembly 202 and
vice versa. Hence, light leaves assembly 202 along layer 204. In some
embodiments of CC component 184,
light also travels from interface 186 through both NA layer 204 and assembly
202 to FA layer 206 and vice
versa. Light leaves FA layer 206 along assembly 202 in those embodiments.
Preferably, no light striking layer
206 along assembly 202 passes fully through layer 206 to interface 136 during
the normal or changed state. In
particular, all light striking layer 206 along assembly 202 is preferably
either absorbed or reflected by layer 206
so that there is no ARsb or XRsb light.
- 65 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
102901 Auxiliary layers 204 and 206 may or may not be significantly
involved in determining color change
along print area 118. If layer 204 or 206 is significantly involved in
determining color change, the involvement is
usually passive. That is, light processed by layer 204 or 206 undergoes
changes largely caused by changes in
light processed by assembly 202 rather than partly or fully by changes in the
physical or/and chemical
characteristics of layer 204 or 206.
102911 FA layer 206 (if present) operates during the normal state according
to a light non-outputting
normal general far auxiliary mode or one of several versions of a light
outputting normal general far auxiliary
mode depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and
constituted. "GFA" hereafter
means general far auxiliary. Largely no light leaves FA layer 206 along
assembly 202 in the light non-outputting
normal GFA mode. The light outputting normal GFA mode consists of one or both
of the following actions: (i)
any ARsb light passes in substantial part through layer 206 and (ii) light,
termed ADfa light, is reflected or/and
emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202.
102921 ADfa light, which excludes any ARsb light, consists of (a) light (if
any), termed ARfa light, normally
reflected by FA layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202 after striking
SF zone 112, passing through IS
component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), and assembly 202 and (b) light (if
any), termed AEfa light, normally
emitted by layer 206 so as to leave it along assembly 202. Reflected ARfa
light is typically present when ADfa
light is present. The total light (if any), termed ATfa light, leaving layer
206 in the light outputting normal GFA
mode consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided directly by layer 206 and
any ARsb light passing through it.
This operation of layer 206 applies to situations in which it is both
significantly used, and not used, in
determining color change along zone 112.
102931 Taking note that NA layer 204 may not be present in CC component
184, a recitation that light
leaves assembly 202 means that the light leaves it along IS component 182, and
thus via interface 186, if layer
204 is absent. Assembly 202 operates during the normal state according to a
light non-outputting normal
general assembly mode or one of a group of versions of a light outputting
normal general assembly mode
depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and
constituted. "GAB" hereafter means
general assembly. Largely no light normally leaves assembly 202 along NA layer
204 in the light non-outputting
normal GAB mode. The light outputting normal GAB mode consists of one or more
of the following actions: (i) a
substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 passes through
assembly 202, (ii) substantial
parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and AEfa light pass through assembly 202,
and (iii) light, termed ADab light,
is reflected or/and emitted by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer
204.
102941 ADab light, which excludes any ARfa or ARsb light, consists of (a)
light (if any), termed ARab light,
normally reflected by assembly 202 so as to leave it along NA layer 204 after
striking SF zone 112, passing
through IS component 182, and layer 204 and (b) light (if any), termed AEab
light, normally emitted by assembly
202 so as to leave it along layer 204. Reflected ARab light is typically
present when ADab light is present The
- 66 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934
total light, termed ATab light, leaving assembly 202 in the light outputting
normal GAB mode consists of any
ARab and AEab light provided directly by assembly 202, any FA-layer-provided
ARfa and AEfa light passing
through it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
102951 ADfa light is present in some versions, but absent in other
versions, of the light outputting normal
GAB mode. When ADfa light is absent, ARsb light is also usually absent.
Emitted AEab light is typically absent
from the light outputting normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa light is present
in it and vice versa. Either ADab
or ADfa light, and therefore one of ARab, AEab, ARfa, and AEfa light, is
usually a majority component,
preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component,
of each of A, ADic, and ADcc
light depending on how subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are configured and
constituted.
102961 Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light
leaving assembly 202 pass
through NA layer 204. In addition, layer 204 may normally reflect light,
termed ARna light, which leaves it via
interface 186 after striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182
and which thus excludes any
ARab. ARfa, or ARsb light. Total ATcc light normally leaving layer 204, and
therefore CC component 184,
consists of any assembly-provided ARab and AEab light passing through layer
204, any FA-layer-provided ARfa
and AEfa light passing through it, any ARna light reflected by it, and any
ARsb light passing through it.
102971 Inasmuch as any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, and ARsb light leaving NA
layer 204 form ATab light
leaving layer 204 via interface 186, ATcc light leaving CC component 184 is
also expressed as consisting of
ATab light and any ARna light leaving layer 204. Also, any ARab, AEab, ARfa,
AEfa, and ARna light leaving
layer 204 form ADcc light leaving component 184. Substantial parts of any
ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and
ARsb light leaving component 184 pass through IS component 182. Including any
ARis light reflected by
component 182, A light is formed with any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna,
and ARsb light normally
leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
102981 Changes in the color of IDVC portion 138 occur due to changes in
assembly 202 in responding (a)
in first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect provided by IS
segment 192 for the impact meeting
the basic TH impact criteria or (b) in second general 01 embodiments to the
general CC control signal generated
in response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also
being met in the second
embodiments. The assembly changes are sometimes accompanied, as mentioned
above, by changes in the
light processed by NA layer 204, if present, or/and FA layer 206, if present.
Referring to Figs. 12b and 12c with
this in mind, item 212 is the ID segment of assembly 202 present in portion
138. Items 214 and 216 respectively
are the ID segments of auxiliary layers 204 and 206 present in portion 138.
102991 During the changed state, ID segment 216 of FA layer 206 (if
present) temporarily operates, usually
passively, according to a light non-outputting changed GFA mode or one of
several versions of a light outpufting
changed GFA mode. Largely no light leaves FA segment 216 along ID assembly
segment 212 in the light non-
outputting changed GFA mode, "AB" hereafter meaning assembly. The light
outputting changed GFA mode
- 67 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
consists of one or both of the following actions: (i) any XRsb light passes in
substantial part through FA segment
216 and (ii) light, termed XDfa light, is reflected or/and emitted by segment
216 so as to leave it along AB
segment 212.
103001 XDfa light, which excludes any XRsb light, consists of (a) light (if
any), termed XRfa light,
temporarily reflected by FA segment 216 so as to leave it along AB segment 212
after striking print area 118,
passing through IS segment 192, ID segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if present),
and AB segment 212 and (b) light
(if any), termed XEfa light, temporarily emitted by FA segment 216 so as to
leave it along AB segment 212.
Reflected XRfa light is typically present when XDfa light is present.
Reflection of XRfa light or/and emission of
XEfa light leaving FA segment 216 along AB segment 212 usually occur under
control of segment 212 in
response (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to the general impact effect
for the impact meeting the basic
TH impact criteria or (b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general
CC control signal generated in
response to the effect sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being
met in the second embodiments.
If FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light or/and emits AEfa light, a change
in which largely no light temporarily
leaves FA segment 216 likewise usually occurs under control of AB segment 212
in responding to the impact
effect or to the control signal. The total light (if any), termed XTfa light,
leaving FA segment 216 in the light
outputting changed GFA mode consists of any XRfa and XEfa light provided
directly by segment 216 and any
XRsb light passing through it.
103011 The foregoing operation of FA segment 216 applies to situations in
which FA layer 206 is both
significantly used, and not used, in determining color change along print area
118. XDfa light usually differs
materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, and ADfa light if layer 206 is
significantly involved in determining color
change along area h. The same applies usually to XRfa and XEfa light if both
are present and, of course, to
XRfa or XEfa light if it is present but respective XEfa or XRfa light is
absent.
103021 Again noting that NA layer 204 may not be present in CC component
184, a recitation that light
leaves AB segment 212 means that the light leaves segment 212 along IS segment
192, and thus via IF
segment 196, if layer 204 is absent. During the changed state, AB segment 212
responds (a) in the first general
01 embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the second general 01
embodiments to the general CC
control signal generated in response to the effect sometimes dependent on both
the TH impact criteria and other
criteria being met by temporarily operating according to a light non-
outputting changed GAB mode or one of a
group of versions of a light outputting changed GAB mode. Largely no light
leaves segment 212 along NA
segment 214 in the light non-outputting changed GAB mode. The light outputting
changed GAB mode consists
of one or more of the following actions: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb
light passing through FA segment 216
passes through AB segment 212, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-
provided XRfa and XEfa fight pass
through segment 212, and (iii) light, termed XDab light, is reflected or/and
emitted by segment 212 so as to
leave it along NA segment 214.
- 68 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103031 XDab light, which excludes any XRfa or XRsb light, consists of (a)
light (if any), termed XRab light,
temporarily reflected by AB segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214
after striking print area 118,
passing through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 and (b) light (if any),
termed XEab light, temporarily
emitted by AS segment 212 so as to leave it along NA segment 214. Reflected
XRab light is typically present
when XDab light is present. The total light, termed XTab light, leaving AS
segment 212 in the light outputting
changed GAB mode consists of any XRab and XEab light provided directly by
segment 212, any FA-segment-
provided XRfa and XEfa light passing through it, and any XRsb light passing
through it.
103041 XDfa light is present in some versions, but is absent in other
versions, of the light outputting
changed GAB mode. When XDfa light is absent, XRsb light is also usually
absent. Emitted XEab light is
typically absent from the light outputting changed GAB mode when emitted XEfa
light is present in it and vice
versa. XDab light usually differs materially from A. ADic, ADcc, ADab, and
ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not
significantly involved in determining color change along print area 118. The
same applies usually to XRab and
XEab light if both are present and, of course, to XRab or XEab light if it is
present but respective XEab or XRab
light is absent. Either XDab or XDfa light, and thus one of XRab, XEab, XRfa,
and XEfa light, is usually a
majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each
of X, XDic, and XDcc light depending on the configuration and constitution of
subcomponents 202, 204, and
206.
103051 Substantial parts of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light
leaving AS segment 212 pass
through NA segment 214. In addition, segment 214 may reflect light, termed
XRna light, which leaves it via IF
segment 196 during the changed state after striking print area 118 and passing
through IS segment 192 and
which thus excludes any XRab, XRfa, or XRsb light. XRna light is usually
largely ARna light. If NA segment 214
undergoes a change so that XRna light significantly differs from ARna light,
the change usually occurs under
control of AS segment 212 in responding to the general impact effect or to the
general CC control signal. Total
XTcc light temporarily leaving NA segment 214, and therefore CC segment 194,
consists of any AB-segment-
provided XRab and XEab light passing through segment 214, any FA-segment-
provided XRfa and XEfa light
passing through it, any XRna light directly reflected by it, and any XRsb
light passing through it.
103061 Inasmuch as any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, and XRsb light leaving NA
segment 214 form XTab
light leaving it via IF segment 196, XTcc light leaving CC segment 194 is also
expressed as consisting of XTab
light and any XRna light leaving NA segment 214. Any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa,
and XRna light leaving
segment 214 form XDcc light leaving CC segment 194. Substantial parts of any
XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa,
XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 pass through IS segment 192. If IS
component 182 normally reflects
ARis light, segment 192 continues to reflect ARis light. X light is formed
with any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa,
ARis, XRna, and XRsb light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138.
- 69 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCMS2017/057934
103071 Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X occurring in
the absence of ARna and XRna
light can be created by varying the reflection characteristics of NA layer
204, specifically the wavelength and
intensity characteristics of ARna and XRna light, without changing assembly
202 or FA layer 206. NA layer 204
can thus strongly influence color A or/and color X.
103081 Either of the changed GAB modes, including any of the versions of
the light outputting changed
GAB mode, can generally be employed with either of the normal GAB modes,
including any of the versions of
the right outputting normal GAB mode, in an embodiment of CC component 184
except for employing the light
non-outputting changed GAB mode with the light non-outputting normal GAB mode
provided, however, that the
operation of the changed GAB mode is compatible with the operation of normal
GAB mode in that embodiment.
This compatibility requirement may effectively preclude employing certain
versions of the light outputting
changed GAB mode with certain versions of the light outputting normal GAB
mode.
103091 When two versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode differ
only in that ARsb light is present
in one of the versions and absent in the other, the difference is generally of
a relatively minor nature. The same
applies when the only difference between two versions of the light outputting
changed GAB mode is that XRsb
light is present in one of the versions and absent in the other. Subject to
the preceding compatibility
requirement, the major combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one
of the normal GAB modes
consist of employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light
outputting changed GAB mode for
a version in which (a) XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216
passes through AB segment 212
or/and (b) XRab or/and XEab light is provided directly by segment 212 with the
light non-outputting normal GAB
mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a) ARfa
or/and AEfa light provided by FA
layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARab or/and AEab light is
provided directly by assembly 202
again except for employing the light non-outputting changed GAB mode with the
light non-outputting normal
GAB mode.
Configuration and General Operation of Electrode Assembly
103101 Electrode assembly 202 in 01 structure 200 consists of a principal
core layer 222, principal near
(first) electrode structure 224, and principal far (second) electrode
structure 226 located generally opposite, and
spaced apart from, near electrode structure 224. Core layer 222 lies between
electrode structures 224 and 226.
"NE" and "FE" hereafter respectively mean near electrode and far electrode. FE
structure 226 is farther away
from SF zone 112 than NE structure 224 so that structures 224 and 226
respectively meet auxiliary layers 204
and 206. Core layer 222 and structures 224 and 226 all usually extend parallel
to one another and to auxiliary
layers 204 and 206, zone 112, and interface 136. Each structure 224 or 226
contains a layer (not separately
shown) for conducting electricity. Structures 224 and 226 control core layer
222 as further described below and
typically process light, usually passively, which affects the operation of
layer 222 and thus CC component 184.
- 70 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103111 Light travels from NA layer 204 or. if it is absent, from interface
186 through NE structure 224
(including its electrode layer) to core layer 222 and vice versa. Accordingly,
light leaves layer 222 along
structure 224. In some embodiments of CC component 184, light travels from
interface 186 through structure
224, layer 222, and FE structure 226 (similarly including its electrode layer)
to FA layer 206 and vice versa so
that light leaves layer 206 along structure 226.
103121 FE structure 226 operates as follows during the normal state. When
assembly 202 is in the light
non-outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light leaves structure 226 along
core layer 222. One or more of the
following actions occur with structure 226 when assembly 202 is in the light
outputting normal GAB mode: (i) a
substantial part of any ARsb light passing through FA layer 206 (if present)
passes through structure 226, (ii)
substantial parts of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by layer 206 pass
through structure 226, and (iii) structure
226 reflects light, termed ARfe light, which leaves it along core layer 222
after striking SF zone 112 and passing
through IS component 182, NA layer 204 (if present), NE structure 224, and
core layer 222 and which thus
excludes any ARfa or ARsb light. The total light (if any), termed ATfe light,
normally leaving structure 226
consists of any ARfa and AEfa light provided by FA layer 206 so as to pass
through structure 226, any ARfe light
directly reflected by it, and any ARsb light passing through it.
103131 Core layer 222 operates as follows during the normal state. When
assembly 202 is in the light non-
outputting normal GAB mode, largely no light normally leaves layer 222 along
NE structure 224. One or more of
the following actions occur with layer 222 when assembly 202 is in the light
outputting normal GAB mode so as
to implement it for layer 222: (i) a substantial part of any ARsb light
passing through FE structure 226 passes
through layer 222, (ii) substantial parts of any FA-layer-provided ARfa and
AEfa light passing through structure
226 pass through layer 222, (iii) a substantial part of any ARfe light
reflected by structure 226 passes through
layer 222, and (iv) light, termed ADcl light and of wavelength for a normal
reflected/emitted core color ADcl, is
reflected or/and emitted by layer 222 so as to leave it along NE structure
224.
103141 ADel light, which excludes any ARfe, ARfa, or ARsb light, consists
of (a) light (if any), termed ARcl
light and of wavelength for a normal reflected core color ARcl, normally
reflected by core layer 222 so as to
leave it along NE structure 224 after striking SF zone 112, passing through IS
component 182, NA layer 204,
and structure 224 and (b) light (if any), termed AEcl light and of wavelength
for a normal emitted core color AEcl,
normally emitted by core layer 222 so as to leave it along structure 224.
Reflected ARcl light is typically present
when ADcl light is present. The total light, termed ATcl light and of
wavelength for a normal total core color
ATcl, leaving layer 222 in the light outputting normal GAB mode consists of
any ARcl and AEcl light provided
directly by layer 222 and any ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb light passing through
it.
103151 Emitted AEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting
normal GAB mode when emitted AEfa
light is present in it and vice versa. When ADfa light is absent, each of ADcl
light and either ARcl or AEcl light is
usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority component, more
preferably a 90% majority
- 71 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934
component, of each of A. ADic, ADcc, and ADab light depending on how
subcomponents 202, 204, and 206 are
configured and constituted.
103161 Substantial parts of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe, and ARsb
light normally leaving core layer
222 pass through NE structure 224. In addition, structure 224 may normally
reflect light, termed ARne light,
which leaves it along NA layer 204 after striking SF zone 112 and passing
through IS component 182 and layer
204 and which thus excludes any ARcl, ARfa, ARfe, or ARsb light. Total ATab
light normally leaving structure
224, and therefore assembly 202, consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARfe,
and ARsb light passing through
structure 224 and any ARne light directly reflected by it.
103171 Any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NE structure 224 form
ADab light leaving assembly
202. Any ARcl, AEcl, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, ARne, and ARfe light leaving NA layer
204 form ADcc light leaving CC
component 184. Additionally, ARce light reflected by component 184 consists of
any ARab, ARfa, and ARna
light, ARab light being formed with any ARcl, ARne, and ARfe light. AEcc light
emitted by component 184
consists of any AEab and AEfa light, AEab light being formed with any AEcl
light.
103181 Changes in AB segment 212 during the changed state arise from
electrical signals applied to
electrode structures 224 and 226 in response (a) in the first general 01
embodiments to the general impact effect
provided by IS segment 192 for the impact meeting the basic TH impact criteria
or (b) in the second general 01
embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response to the
effect sometimes dependent on
other impact criteria also being met in the second embodiments. Referring
again to Figs. 12b and 12c, item 232
is the ID segment of core layer 222 present in IDVC portion 138. Items 234 and
236 respectively are the ID
segments of structures 224 and 226 present in portion 138.
103191 ID FE segment 236 operates as follows during the changed state. When
assembly 202 is in the
light non-outputting changed GAB mode, largely no light leaves FE segment 236
along ID core segment 232.
One or more of the following actions occur with FE segment 236 when assembly
202 is in the light outputting
changed GAB mode: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through ID
segment 216 of FA layer 206 (if
present) passes through segment 236, (ii) substantial parts of any XRfa and
XEfa light provided by FA segment
216 pass through segment 236, and (iii) segment 236 reflects light, termed
XRfe light, which leaves it along core
segment 232 after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192,
segment 214 of NA layer 204 (if
present), ID NE segment 234, and core segment 232 and which thus excludes any
XRfa or XRsb light. The total
light (if any), termed XTfe light, temporarily leaving FE segment 236 consists
of any FA-segment-provided XRfa
and XEfa light passing through segment 236, any XRfe light directly reflected
by it, and any XRsb light passing
through it. XRfe light can be the same as, or significantly different from,
ARfe light depending on how the light
processing in IDVC portion 138 during the changed state differs from the light
processing in VC region 106
during the normal state.
- 72 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
10320] Core segment 232 responds (a) in the first general 01 embodiments to
the general impact effect or
(b) in the second general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal
generated in response to the effect
sometimes dependent on both the TH impact criteria and other criteria being
met by temporarily operating as
follows during the changed state. When assembly 202 is in the light non-
outputting changed GAB mode, largely
no light leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234. One or more of the following
actions occur in core
segment 232 when assembly 202 is in the light outputting changed GAB mode so
as to implement it for segment
232: (i) a substantial part of any XRsb light passing through FE segment 236
passes through core segment 232,
(ii) substantial parts of any FA-segment-provided XRfa and XEfa light passing
through FE segment 236 pass
through core segment 232, (iii) a substantial part of any XRfe light reflected
by FE segment 236 passes through
core segment 232, and (iv) light, termed XDcl light and of wavelength for a
temporary reflected/emitted core
color XDcl, is reflected or/and emitted by segment 232 so as to leave it along
NE segment 234.
103211 XDcl light, which excludes any XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light, consists
of (a) light (if any), termed XRcl
light and of wavelength for a temporary reflected core color XRcl, temporarily
reflected by core segment 232 so
as to leave it along NE segment 234 after striking print area 118, passing
through IS segment 192, NA segment
214, and NE segment 234 and (b) light (if any), termed XEcl light and of
wavelength for a temporary emitted
core color XEcl, temporarily emitted by core segment 232 so as to leave it
along NE segment 234. Reflected
XRcl light is typically present when XDcl light is present The total light,
termed XTcl light and of wavelength for
a temporary total core color XTcl, leaving core segment 232 in the light
outputting changed GAB mode consists
of any XRcl and XEcl light provided directly by segment 232 and any XRfa,
XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing
through it. XTcl light differs materially from ATcl light.
103221 Emitted XEcl light is typically absent from the light outputting
changed GAB mode when emitted
XEfa light is present in it and vice versa. XDcl light usually differs
materially from A, ADic, ADcc, ADab, ADcl,
and ADfa light if FA layer 206 is not significantly involved in determining
color change along print area 118. The
same applies usually to XRcl and AEcl light if both are present and, of
course, to XRcl or XEcl light if it is present
but respective XEcl or XRcl light is absent. When XDfa light is absent, each
of XDcl light and either XRcl or
XEcl light is usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority
component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of X, XDic, XDcc, and XDab light depending on how
subcomponents 202, 204, and
206 are configured and constituted.
10323] Substantial parts of any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb
light leaving core segment 232
during the changed state pass through NE segment 234. If NE structure 224
reflects ARne light during the
normal state, segment 234 reflects light, termed XRne light, which leaves it
along NA segment 214 during the
changed state after striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192
and NA segment 214 and which
thus excludes any XRcl, XRfa, XRfe, or XRsb light. XRne light is usually
largely ARne light. If XRne light
significantly differs from ARne light, the difference usually arises due to
segment 214 undergoing a change
under control of AS segment 212 in responding to the general impact effect or
to the general CC control signal.
- 73 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934
Total XTab light temporarily leaving NE segment 234, and therefore AB segment
212, consists of any XRcl,
XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRfe, and XRsb light passing through NE segment 234 and any
XRne light reflected by it.
XTab light differs materially from ATab light.
103241 Any XRcl, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NE segment 234 form
XDab light leaving AB
segment 212. Any XRcl, XEcl, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, XRne, and XRfe light leaving NA
segment 214 form XDcc
light leaving CC segment '194. Also, XRcc light reflected by segment 194
consists of any XRab, XRfa, and
XRna light, XRab light being formed with any XRcl, XRne, and XRfe light. XEcc
light emitted by segment 194
consists of any XEab light and any XEfa light, XEab light being formed with
any XEcl light
103251 Expanding on what was stated above in order to accommodate fight
reflected by NE structure 224,
when two versions of the light outputting normal GAB mode differ only in that
ARne or/and ARsb light is present
in one of the versions and absent in the other version, the difference is
generally of a relatively minor nature.
The same applies when the only difference between two versions of the light
outputting changed GAB mode is
that XRne or/and XRsb light is present in one of the versions and absent in
the other version. Subject to the
above-mentioned compatibility requirement and particularizing to light
provided by core layer 222, the major
combinations of one of the changed GAB modes with one of the normal GAB modes
consist of employing the
light non-outputting changed GAB mode or the light outputting changed GAB mode
for a version in which (a)
XRfa or/and XEfa light provided by FA segment 216 passes through AB segment
212 or/and (b) XRcl or/and
XEcl light provided by core segment 232 passes through NE segment 234 with the
light non-outputting normal
GAB mode or the light outputting normal GAB mode for a version in which (a)
ARfa or/and AEfa light provided
by FA layer 206 passes through assembly 202 or/and (b) ARcl or/and AEcl light
provided by core layer 222
passes through NE structure 224 again except for employing the light non-
outputting changed GAB mode with
the light non-outputting normal GAB mode.
103261 The reliability and longevity of 01 structure 200 are generally
enhanced when the pressure inside
assembly 202, specifically inside core layer 222, is close to atmospheric
pressure. More particularly, the
average pressure across layer 222 of any fluid (liquid or/and gas) in layer
222 during operation of structure 200
is preferably at least 0.25 atm, more preferably at least 0.5 atm, even more
preferably at least 0.75 atm, yet
more preferably at least 0.9 atm, and is preferably no more than 2 atm, more
preferably no more than 1.5 atm,
even more preferably no more than 1.25 atm, yet more preferably no more than
1.1 atm.
Electrode Layers and their Characteristics and Compositions
103271 The electrode layers of NE structure 224 and FE structure 226 are
respectively termed NE and FE
layers and can be embodied in various ways. Each NE or FE layer may be
implemented with two or more
electrode sublayers. In one embodiment, each electrode layer is a patterned
layer laterally extending largely
across the full extent of VC region 106. In another embodiment, one electrode
layer, typically the NE layer, is a
- 74 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
patterned layer extending largely across the full lateral extent of region 106
while the other electrode layer is a
blanket layer (or sheet) extending largely across the full lateral extent of
region 106.
103281 Each patterned electrode layer may consist of one electrode or
multiple electrodes spaced laterally
apart from one another. The space to the sides of each patterned electrode
layer is typically largely occupied
with insulating material but can be largely empty or largely occupied with gas
such as air. If each patterned
electrode layer consists of multiple electrodes, one or more layers of
conductive material may lie over or/and
under the electrodes for electrical contacting them.
103291 When each electrode layer is a patterned layer formed with multiple
electrodes, the patterns can be
the same such that the electrodes in each electrode layer lie respectively
opposite the electrodes in the other
electrode layer. The cellular structures described below for VC region 106 in
regard to Figs. 38a, 38b, 43a, 431),
46a, 46b, 48a, 48b, 50a, 50b, and 53 present examples in which each electrode
layer is a patterned layer
consisting of multiple electrodes with the space to the sides of the
electrodes largely occupied with insulating
material and with the electrodes in each electrode layer lying respectively
opposite the electrodes in the other
electrode layer. Alternatively, the patterns in the electrode layers can
differ materially so that the electrodes in
the NE layer materially overlap the electrodes in the FE layer at selected
sites across region 106.
103301 In a third embodiment of electrode structures 224 and 226, each
electrode layer is a blanket layer
laterally extending largely across the full extent of VC region 106. The
conductivity of one of the blanket
electrode layers, typically the NE layer, is usually so low that a voltage
applied to a specified point in that blanket
layer attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across the layer so as to
effectively be received only in a
relatively small area containing the voltage-application point of that
electrode layer.
103311 Core layer 222 contains thickness locations, termed chief core
thickness locations, lying between
opposite portions of the electrode layers, e.g., thickness locations extending
perpendicular to both electrode
layers. Depending on how the electrode layers are configured, layer 222 may
also have thickness locations,
termed subsidiary core thickness locations, not lying between opposite
portions of the electrode layers. A
subsidiary core thickness location occurs when an infinitely long straight
line extending through that location
generally parallel to its lateral surfaces, generally parallel to the lateral
surfaces of the nearest chief core
thickness location, and generally perpendicular to the electrode layers
extends through only one of the electrode
layers or through neither electrode layer. Let (a) V, represent the
controllable voltage, termed the near (or first)
controllable voltage, at any point in the NE layer, (b) Vt represent the
controllable voltage, termed the far (or
second) controllable voltage, at any point in the FE layer, and (c) V,f
represent the control voltage difference V,, -
Vt between controllable voltages V, and Vt at those two points in the
electrode layers. With the foregoing in
mind, 01 structure 200, including assembly 202, operates as follows.
[03321 Referring to Fig. 12a, near controllable voltage V,, is normally
largely at the same near normal
control value V,-,11 throughout the NE layer regardless of whether it consists
of one electrode, patterned or
- 75 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
unpatterned (blanket), or multiple electrodes. Similarly, far controllable
voltage Vt is normally largely at the same
far normal control value Vpj throughout the FE layer regardless of whether it
is formed with a single electrode,
patterned or unpatterned, or multiple electrodes. Let Ve4 represent the normal
value VnN - Vftj of control voltage
V,f constituted as difference V, - Vt. Ignoring any dielectric or
semiconductor material between core layer 222
and either electrode layer, the electrode layers normally apply (a) a voltage
equal to normal control value Wm
across essentially every chief thickness core location and (b) a voltage of
the same sign as, but of lesser
magnitude than, normal value VAN across any subsidiary thickness core
location.
103331 The characteristics of core layer 222 and the core-layer voltage
distribution resulting from normal
control value V-,trt are chosen so that, during the normal state, total ATab
light consists of any ADab, ADfa, and
ARsb light. Again, ADab light again consists of any ARcl, AEcl, ARne, and ARfe
light while ADfa light consists
of any ARfa and AEfa light. NA layer 204 is sufficiently transmissive of ATab
light that ATcc light formed with
ATab light and any ARna light normally leaves CC component 184. Similarly, IS
component 182 is sufficiently
transmissive of ATcc light that A light formed with ATcc light and any ARis
light normally leaves VC region 106.
10334j VC region 106 often provides the principal general CC control signal
in response to the general
impact effect supplied by IS segment 192. Referring to Figs. 12b and 12c, the
control signal consists of
changing control voltage V1 for IDVC portion 138 to a changed control value
\Imo materially different from normal
control value Vnf14. Region 106 goes to the changed state. The control signal
as formed with changed control
value VpfC can be generated by various parts of region 106, e.g., by component
182, specifically segment 192,
or by a portion, such as NA layer 204, of CC component '164. Voltage VI
remains substantially at normal value
VnfN for the remainder of region 106.
(03351 The general CC control signal can alternatively originate outside VC
region 106. For instance, the
control signal can be a general CC initiation signal conditionally supplied
from an intelligent CC controller as
described below for Figs. 64a and 64b. In a cellular embodiment of assembly
202 as described below for Figs.
43a and 43b, 46a and 46b, 48a and 48b, 50a and 50b, or 53, the control signal
can consist of multiple cellular
CC initiation signals supplied respectively to full CM cells, specifically to
their electrode parts, as described
below for Fig. 71 or 73.
[03361 The general CC control signal is applied between a voltage-
application location in the NE layer and
a voltage-application location in the FE layer. "VA" hereafter means voltage-
application. At least one of the VA
locations is in ID segment 194 of CC component 184 and depends on where object
104 contacts SF zone 112.
Near controllable voltage Vr, at the VA location in the NE layer is then at a
near (or first) CC control value Võc.
Far controllable voltage Vf at the VA location in the FE layer is at a far (or
second) CC control value Vfc.
Depending on how the control signal is generated, CC values Vic and V10 may be
respectively the same as, or
respectively differ from, normal values Vrtl and WI as long as far CC value
VIC differs materially from far normal
- 76 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
value VfN if near CC value Va-; is the same as near normal value Val and vice
versa. In any event. CC values
Vnc. and Vfc are chosen so that changed value Vic differs materially from
normal value VA.
103371 The VA locations in the electrode layers can be variously
implemented depending on their
configurations. If each electrode layer is a patterned layer, the VA location
in the NE layer extends partly or fully
across ID segment 234 of NE structure 224, and the VA location in the FE layer
extends partly or fully across ID
segment 236 of FE structure 226. If one of the electrode layers, typically the
NE layer, is a patterned layer while
the other electrode layer is a blanket layer, the VA location in the patterned
electrode layer extends partly or fully
across its electrode segment 234 or 236, and the VA location in the other
electrode layer extends partly or fully
across the other electrode segment 236 or 234 and laterally beyond that other
electrode segment 236 or 234,
e.g., across the full lateral extent of VC region 106. If either patterned
electrode layer consists of multiple
electrodes, the VA location in that multi-electrode electrode layer may partly
or fully encompass two or more of
its electrodes.
103381 If each electrode layer is a blanket layer with the conductivity of
one of the electrode layers, again
typically the NE layer, being so low that a voltage applied to a specified
point in that blanket electrode layer
attenuates relatively rapidly in spreading across it so as to effectively be
received only in a relatively small area
containing that layer's VA point, the small area in that blanket electrode
layer constitutes its VA location and lies
in electrode segment 234 or 236 where voltage V-, or V1 is effectively
received at CC value Vra-; or Vfc. The VA
location in the other electrode layer usually extends partly or fully across
its electrode segment 236 or 234 and
laterally beyond its electrode segment 236 or 234, e.g., again across the full
lateral extent of VC region 106.
103391 The common feature of the preceding ways of configuring the
electrode layers is that the general
CC control signal is applied between electrode segments 234 and 236. Ignoring
any dielectric or semiconductor
material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer, electrode segments
234 and 236 temporarily apply
(a) a voltage equal to changed control value V,,g; across essentially every
chief thickness core location in core
segment 232 and (b) a voltage of the same sign as, but of lesser magnitude
than, changed value Vac across
any subsidiary thickness core location in segment 232. If there is no
subsidiary thickness location in segment
232, the control signal is simply applied across segment 232, again ignoring
any dielectric or semiconductor
material between core layer 222 and either electrode layer.
103401 The characteristics of core layer 222 and the core-segment voltage
distribution resulting from
changed value \ink', are chosen so that core segment 232 responds to the
general CC control signal, and thus to
the general impact effect from which the control signal is generated for the
impact meeting the basic TH impact
criteria sometimes dependent on other impact criteria also being met, by
undergoing internal change that
enables XTab light leaving AB segment 212 to consist of any XDab, XDfa, and
XRsb light. Again, XDab light
consists of any XRci, XEcl, XRne, and XRfe light while XDfa light consists of
any XRfa and XEfa light. NA layer
204 is sufficiently transmissive of XTab light that XTcc light formed with
XTab light and any XRna light
- 77 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/(157934
temporarily leaves CC segment 194. Similarly, IS component 182 is sufficiently
transmissive of XIcc light that X
light formed with XTcc light and any ARis light temporarily leaves IDVC
portion 138.
10:341 ) NA layer 204 can include a programmable reflection-adjusting layer
(not separately shown),
typically separated from assembly 202 by insulating material, for being
electrically programmed subsequent to
manufacture of 01 structure 200 for adjusting colors A and X. "RA" hereafter
means reflection-adjusting. The
RA layer is preferably clear transparent prior to programming. The programming
causes the RA layer to
become tinted transparent or more tinted transparent if it originally was
tinted transparent. ARna light is thereby
adjusted. XRna light is also adjusted, typically in a way corresponding to the
ARna adjustment. As a result,
colors A and X are adjusted respectively from an initial principal color A,
and an initial changed color X, prior to
programming to a final principal color A/ and a final changed color X1
subsequent to programming.
[03421 The programming of the RA layer can be variously done, In one
programming technique, a
temporary blanket conductive programming layer is deployed on SF zone 112
prior to programming. In another
programming technique, 01 structure 200 includes a permanent blanket
conductive programming layer, typically
constituted with part of NA layer 204, lying between zone 112 and the RA
layer. In both techniques, a
programming voltage is applied between the programming layer and NE structure
224 sufficiently long to cause
the RA layer to change to a desired tinted transparency. The programming
layer, if a temporary one, is usually
removed from zone 112. The tinting adjustment can be caused by introduction of
RA ions into the RA layer. If
the NE layer is patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE
layer usually undergoes the same
tinting adjustment as the RA material between the programming layer and the NE
layer.
(0343j Alternatively, core layer 222 can include a programmable RA layer
lying along NE structure 224
and having the preceding transparency characteristics. The core RA layer is
programmed to a desired tinted
transparency by applying a programming voltage between the NE and FE layers
for a suitable time period.
Introduction of RA ions into the core RA layer can cause the tinting
adjustment. If the NE or FE layer is
patterned, the RA material to the sides of the patterned NE or FE layer
usually undergoes the same tinting
adjustment as the RA material between the NE and FE layers. The magnitude of
the programming voltage is
usually much greater than the magnitudes of control values VIIN and VrIfc.
Regardless of whether the RA layer is
located in NA layer 204 or structure 224, the programming voltage can be a
selected one of plural different
programming values for causing final principal color Alto be a corresponding
one of like plural different specific
final principal colors and for causing final changed color X/ to be a
corresponding one of like plural different
specific final changed colors.
103441 The NE layer transmits at least 40% of incident light across at
least part of the visible spectrum and
consists of conductive material or/and resistive material whose resistivity
is, for example, 10 - 100 ohm-cm at
300 K. This conductive or/and resistive material is termed transparent
conductive material since the resistivity
of the resistive material, when present, is close to the upper limit,10 ohm-cm
at 300 K, of the resistivity for
- 78 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
conductive material. "TCM" hereafter means transparent conductive material.
The FE layer is similarly formed
with TOM if visible light is intended to pass fully through one or more
thickness locations of core layer 222 at
certain times.
103451 In situations where a thin layer of a TOM transmits at least 40% of
incident light across part, but not
all, of the visible spectrum, the selection of colors of light to be
transmitted by the thin layer is limited to the part
of the visible spectrum across which the layer transmits at least 40% of
incident light. The part of the visible
spectrum across which a thin layer of a TOM transmits at least 40% of incident
light may be single portion
continuous in wavelength or a plurality of portions separated by portions in
which the thin layer transmits less
than 40% of incident light. The transmissivity of incident visible light of a
thin layer of the TOM across part,
preferably all, of the visible spectrum is usually at least 50%, preferably at
least 60%, more preferably at least
80%, even more preferably at least 90%, yet further preferably at least 95%.
103461 The thicknesses of a TOM layer meeting the preceding transmissivity
criteria is typically 0.1 - 0.2
pm but can be more or less. The layer thickness can generally be controlled.
However, the layer thickness is
sometimes determined by the characteristics of the TOM. For instance, the
thickness of graphene when used
as the TOM is largely the diameter of a carbon atom because graphene consists
of a single layer of hexagonally
arranged carbon atoms. The transmissivity normally increases with increasing
resistivity and vice versa. In
particular, decreasing the TOM layer thickness (when controllable) typically
causes the transmissivity and
resistivity of the TOM layer to increase and vice versa.
103471 The transmissivity and resistivity of a TOM layer often depend on
how it is fabricated. All of the
materials identified below as TOM candidates meet the preceding TOM
transmissivity and resistivity criteria for
at least one set of TOM manufacturing conditions. If the transmissivity is too
low, the transmissivity can
generally be increased at the cost of increasing the resistivity by
appropriately adjusting the manufacturing
conditions or/and reducing the TOM layer thickness (when controllable). If the
resistivity is too high, the
resistivity can generally be reduced at the cost of reducing the
transmissivity by appropriately adjusting the
manufacturing conditions or/and increasing the TOM layer thickness (when
controllable).
103481 Many TOM candidates are transparent conductive oxides generally
classified as (i) n-type meaning
that majority conduction is by electrons or (ii) p-type meaning that majority
conduction is by holes. TOO
hereafter means transparent conductive oxide. N-type TCOs are generally much
more conductive than p-type
TOOs. In particular, the resistivites of n-type TCOs are often several factors
of 10 below 1 ohm-cm at 300 K
whereas the resistivifies of p-type TCOs are commonly 1 - 10 ohm-cm at 300 K.
103491 TOOs include undoped (essentially pure) metallic oxides and doped
metallic oxides. In using a
dopant metal to convert an undoped TOO containing one or more primary metals
into a doped TOO, a dopant
metal atom may replace a primary metal atom. Alternatively or additionally, a
dopant metal atom may be added
to the undoped TOO. The molar amount of dopant metal in a doped TCO is usually
considerably less than the
- 79 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
molar amount of primary metal in the TOO. If the molar amount of "dopant"
metal approaches the molar amount
of primary metal, the TOO is often described below as a mixture of oxides of
the constituent metals. In some
situations, a TOM candidate containing multiple metals is identified below
both as a doped TOO and as a
mixture of oxides of the metals.
103501 Stoichiornetric chemical names and/or stoichiometric chemical
formulas are generally used below
to identify TCM candidates. However, many TOM candidates, especially undoped
TC0s, are insulators or
semiconductors in their pure stoichiometric formulations. Conductivity
sufficiently high for those materials to be
Tarts arises from defects in the materials or/and TOM formulations that are
somewhat non-stoichiometric.
N-type (electron) conductivity sufficiently high to enable an undoped TOO to
be an n-type TOM commonly arises
when the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the
stoichiometric oxygen amount (oxygen
vacancy) or, equivalently, the molar amount of metal in the TOO is somewhat
above the stoichiometric metal
amount. Similarly, p-type (hole) conductivity sufficiently high to enable an
undoped TOO to be a p-type TOM
commonly arises when the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above
the stoichiometric oxygen
amount (oxygen excess) or; equivalently, the molar amount of metal in the TOO
is somewhat below the
stoichiometric metal amount.
103511 In light of the preceding chemical considerations, identifications
of TOM candidates by their
stoichiometric chemical names and/or stoichiometric chemical formulas here
implicitly include formulations that
are somewhat non-stoichiometric. More particularly, identification of an
undoped n-type TOO by its
stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula
includes formulations in which the molar
amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric amount. The
same applies to a TOO in
which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat below the
stoichiometric oxygen amount and in
which the TOO includes dopant such that the TOO still conducts n-type.
Identification of a p-type TOO, doped
or undoped, by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric
chemical formula similarly includes
formulations in which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above
the stoichiometric amount.
103521 Situations arise in which the molar amount of oxygen in a TOO is
somewhat below the
stoichiometric amount and in which the TOO includes dopant at a sufficiently
high content that the TOO
conducts p-type instead of n-type. Identification of such a p-type doped TOO
by its stoichiometric chemical
name or/and its stoichiometric chemical formula, includes formulations in
which the molar amount of oxygen in
the TOO is somewhat below the stoichiometric amount. Situations can also arise
in which the molar amount of
oxygen in a TOO is somewhat above the stoichiometric amount and in which the
TOO includes dopant at a
sufficiently high content that the TOO conducts n-type instead of p-type.
Identification of such an n-type doped
TOO by its stoichiometric chemical name or/and its stoichiometric chemical
formula includes formulations in
which the molar amount of oxygen in the TOO is somewhat above the
stoichiometric amount.
- 80 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
[0353] The following conventions are employed in presenting TOM candidates.
Alternative chemical
names for some TOM candidates are presented in brackets after their UPAC
names, The name of a TOM
candidate consisting essentially of a mixture of two or more compounds is
presented as the names of the
compounds with a dash separating the names of each pair of constituent
compounds. The name of a TOM
candidate containing dopant is presented as the name of the undoped compound
followed by a colon and the
name of the dopant. When the dopant consists of two or more different
materials, a dash separates each pair of
dopants. Many TOM candidates are placed in sets having certain characteristics
in common. In some
situations, a TOM candidate has the characteristics for multiple TOM sets. The
TOM candidate then generally
appears in each appropriate TOM set.
10354 j The fomiula for a TOM candidate consisting of an indefinite number
of repeating units is generally
given as the repeating unit followed by the subscript "n", e.g., On for a
carbon TOM. When a TOM candidate
contains two or more constituents each formed with an indefinite number of
repeating units, each constituents
portion of the formula is generally given as that constituents repeating unit
followed by a subscript consisting of
"n" and a sequentially increasing number beginning with "1", e.g. Cn1-
(O6H40242 for graphene-poly(3,4-
ethyldioxythiophene).
10355 ) Preferred TOM candidates are graphene-containing materials because
they generally provide high
transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high conductivity, high
shock resistance, and high mechanical
strength. In addition to graphene Or, itself, graphene-containing TOM
candidates include bilayer graphene O,
few-layer graphene C, graphene foam CO3 graphene-graphite C:,1-O02, graphene-
carbon nanotubes Cõi-C2,
few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes C01-C,2, graphene-gold On-Au, few-layer
graphene-gold CreAu, few-layer
graphene-iron trichloride graphene-diindiurn trioxide [graphene-indium
oxide] On-41203, graphene-
poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene) Oni-(C6H40242, graphene-silver nanowires Or!-A9,
and dopant-containing
materials boron-doped graphene C,,:B (p-type), gold trichloride-doped graphene
C:AuCt?., gold-doped graphene
On:Au, gold-doped few-layer graphene On:Au, graphene-doped silicon dioxide
Si02:On, nitric acid-doped
graphene On:HNO3 (Hype), nitrogen-doped graphene On:N (n-type),
tetracyanoquinodimethane-doped
graphene On:(NO)2CO6H4O(ON)2 (p-type), graphene-doped carbon nanotubes
Cni:Cr,2, and graphene-doped
poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate) (Cd-1402S)ni -
(C8H80342:Cn.
10356 j Highly desirable TOM candidates are carbon-nanotube-containing
materials because they generally
provide high transmissivity in the visible spectrum, relatively high
conductivity, high shock resistance, and high
mechanical strength. In addition to carbon nanotubes On itself, carbon-
nanotube-containing TOM candidates
include carbon nanotubes-gold C-Au and nitric acid-thionyl chloride-doped
carbon nanotubes C,:HNO3-S0013
(p-type) plus graphene-carbon nanotubes, few-layer graphene-carbon nanotubes,
and graphene-doped carbon
nanotubes also in the graphene-containing TOM candidates.
- 81 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103571 Certain organic materials, including materials formed with both
organic and non-organic
constituents, can serve as the TOM. Although organic TOM candidates generally
have considerably higher
resistivities than graphene and carbon nanotubes, some transparent organic
materials provide relatively high
shock resistance and relatively high mechanical strength. Organic TOM
candidates of this type include poly(3,4-
ethylenedioxythiophene) (O6H402S), termed PEDOT, poly(3,4-
ethylenedioxythiophene)-poly(styrenesulfonate)
(C61-1402S)ra-(C31-1E;03S),,2 termed PEDOT-PSS, and methanol-doped poly(3,4-
ethylenedioxythiophene)-
poly(styrenesulfonate) (C6H402S),-0-(C81-1803S)2:CF130H, i.e., methanol-doped
PEDOT-PSS, plus graphene-
poly(3,4-ethyldioxythiophene), graphene-doped poly(3,4-ethylenedioxythiophene)-
poly(styrenesulfonate), and
tetracyanoquinodimethane-doped graphene also in the graphene-containing TOM
candidates. Each organic
TOM candidate is a polymer or a polymer-containing material.
103581 The preceding graphene-containing, carbon-nanotube-containing, and
organic TOM candidates
constitute sets of a larger set of carbon-containing TOM candidates. Subject
to excluding graphene-diindium
trioxide, nitric acid-thionyl chloride-doped carbon nanotubes, graphene-doped
silicon dioxide, and nitric acid-
doped graphene because they all contain oxides, the set of carbon-containing
TOM candidates are part of an
even larger set of transparent non-oxide TOM candidates that includes a set of
halide-containing TOM
candidates, a set of metal sulfide-containing TOM candidates, a set of metal
nitride-containing TOM candidates,
and a set of metal nanowire-containing TOM candidates. In addition to few-
layer graphene-iron trichloride and
gold trichloride-doped graphene also in the carbon-containing TOM candidates,
halide-containing non-oxide
TOM candidates include p-type copper-containing halides barium copper selenium
fluoride BaCuSeF, barium
copper tellurium fluoride BaCuTeF, and copper iodide Cul.
103591 Metal sulfide-containing non-oxide TOM candidates include barium
dicopper disulfide BaCu2S2
(p-type), copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS2 (p-type), and dopant-containing
materials aluminum-doped zinc
sulfide ZnS:Al and zinc-doped copper aluminum disulfide CuAlS2:Zn (p-type).
Metal nitride-containing non-oxide
TOM candidates include gallium nitride GaN and titanium nitride TiN. Metal
nanowire-containing non-oxide TOM
candidates include copper nanowires Cu, gold nanowires Au, and silver
nanowires Ag plus graphene-silver
nanowires also in the graphene-containing TOM candidates.
103601 Undoped n-type TCO candidates for the TOM include cadmium oxide CdO,
cadmium oxide-
diindium trioxide [cadmium-indium oxide] CdO-1n203, cadmium oxide-diindium
trioxide-tin dioxide [cadmium-
indium-tin oxide] CdO-1n203-SnO2 [Cd-In-Sn-0], cadmium oxide-tin dioxide
[cadmium-tin oxide] CdO-5n02
[Od-Sn-0], cadmium tin trioxide CdSn03, dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide [cobalt-
nickel oxide] Co203-NiO, digallium
trioxide [gallium oxide] Ga203, digallium trioxide-tin dioxide [gallium-tin
oxide] Ga203-Sn02, diindium trioxide
[indium oxide] In203, diindium trioxide-digallium trioxide [indium gallium
oxide] 1n203-Ga203, diindium trioxide-tin
dioxide [indium-tin oxide] 1n703-Sn02, ditantalum oxide Ta20, dizinc diindium
pentoxide Zn2In205,
dodecacalcium decaluminum tetrasilicon pentatricontoxide Ca12AhoSi4035,
digallium trioxide-diindium trioxide-tin
dioxide (gallium-indium-tin oxide] Ga203-1n203-SnO2 [Ga-ln-Sn-01, digallium
irioxide-diindium trioxide-zinc oxide
- 82 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[gallium-indium-zinc oxide] Ga203-1n203-ZnO [Ga-ln-Zn-O], germanium dioxide-
zinc oxide-diindium trioxide
[germanium-zinc-indium oxide] Ge02-ZnO-In203 [Ge-Zn-ln-O], indium gallium
trioxide InGa03, iridium dioxide
Ir02, lead dioxide Pb02, magnesium indium gallium tetroxide MgInGa04,
ruthenium dioxide Ru02, strontium
germanium trioxide SrGe03, tetrazinc diindium heptoxide ZNIn207, tetrindium
tritin dodecaoxide In4Sn3012, tin
dioxide Sn02, tricadmium tellurium hexoxide Cd3Te06, trizinc diindium hexoxide
Zn3In206, zinc indium aluminum
tetroxide ZnInA104, zinc indium gallium tetroxide ZnInGa04, zinc oxide ZnO,
zinc oxide-diindium trioxide [zinc-
indium oxide] ZnO-In203 [Zn-In-0], zinc oxide-indium gallium trioxide ZnO-
InGa03, zinc oxide-diindium trioxide-
tin dioxide [zinc-indium-tin oxide] ZnO-1n203-SnO2 [Zn-ln-Sn-O], zinc oxide-
magnesium oxide [zinc-magnesium
oxide] ZnO-MgO [Zn-Mg-O], and zinc tin trioxide ZnSn03. Undoped n-type TOO TOM
candidates further
include spinel-structured materials cadmium digallium tetroxide CdGa204,
cadmium diindium tetroxide CdIn204,
dicadmium tin tetroxide Cd2Sn04, dizinc tin tetroxide Zn2Sn04, magnesium
diindium tetroxide MgIn204, and zinc
digallium tetroxide ZnGa204.
10361] A first set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc
oxide singly doped with certain
elements including aluminum, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine, cobalt,
copper, fluorine, gallium, germanium,
hafnium, hydrogen, indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, nickel,
niobium, nitrogen, phosphorus,
scandium, silicon, silver, tantalum, terbium, tin, titanium, tungsten,
vanadium, yttrium, and zirconium. A second
set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide codoped with two
or more of the preceding
elements. Specific n-type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include aluminum-
boron, aluminum-fluorine,
aluminum-nitrogen, boron-fluorine, gallium-aluminum, indium-aluminum, indium-
fluorine, scandium-aluminum,
saver-nitrogen, titanium-aluminum, tungsten-hydrogen, tungsten-indium,
tungsten-manganese, yttrium-
aluminum, and zirconium-aluminum.
103621 A third set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of tin
dioxide singly doped with certain
elements including aluminum, antimony, arsenic, boron, cadmium, chlorine,
cobalt, copper, fluorine, gallium,
indium, iron, lithium, manganese, molybdenum, niobium, silver, tantalum,
tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of
the tin dioxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants. A fourth set of doped n-type
TOO TOM candidates consists of
tin dioxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and hafnium.
Specific n-type dopant
combinations for tin dioxide include hafnium-antimony and indium-gallium.
103631 A fifth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of diindium
trioxide singly doped with
certain elements including fluorine, gallium, germanium, hafnium, iodine,
magnesium, molybdenum, niobium,
tantalum, tin, titanium, tungsten, zinc, and zirconium. Most of the indium
oxide dopants are zinc oxide dopants.
A sixth set of doped n-type TCO TOM candidates consists of diindium trioxide
codoped with two or more of the
preceding elements and cadmium. Specific n-type dopant combinations for
diindium trioxide include cadmium-
tin, magnesium-tin, and zinc-tin.
- 83 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103641 A seventh set of doped n-type TCO TCM candidates consists of cadmium
oxide singly doped with
certain elements including aluminum, chromium, copper, fluorine, gadolinium,
gallium, germanium, hydrogen,
indium, iron, molybdenum, samarium, scandium, tin, titanium, yttrium, and
zinc. Most of the cadmium oxide
dopants are zinc oxide dopants. An eighth set of doped n-type TOO TOM
candidates consists of indium gallium
trioxide singly doped with certain elements including germanium and tin. A
ninth set of doped n-type TCO TOM
candidates consists of barium tin trioxide BaSnO3 singly doped with certain
elements including antimony and
lanthanum. A tenth set of doped n-type TOO TOM candidates consists of
strontium tin trioxide SrTiO3 singly
doped with certain elements including antimony, lanthanum, and niobium. An
eleventh set of doped n-type TOO
TOM candidates consists of titanium dioxide TiO2 singly doped with certain
elements including cobalt, niobium,
and tantalum.
[03651 A twelfth set of doped n-type TCO TOM candidates consists of zinc
oxide-diindium trioxide singly
doped with certain elements including aluminum, gallium, germanium, and tin. A
thirteenth set of doped n-type
TOO TOM candidates consists of zinc oxide-magnesium oxide singly doped with
certain elements including
aluminum, gallium, indium, and nitrogen. Further doped n-type TOO TOM
candidates include antimony-doped
strontium tin trioxide SrSn03:Sb, bismuth-doped lead dioxide Pb02:Bi, niobium-
doped calcium titanium trioxide
CaTiO3:Nb, tin-doped iron copper dioxide FeCu02:Sn, yttrium-doped cadmium
diantimony hexoxide CdSb206:Y,
gadolinium-cerium-doped cadmium oxide OdO:Gd-Oe, neodymium-niobium-doped
strontium titanium trioxide
SrTiO3:Nd-Nb, and hydrogen-doped ultraviolet-irradiated dodecacalcium
heptaluminum triticontoxide
Ca12A17033:H-UV [12Ca0.7A1203:H-UV].
103661 Undoped p-type TOO candidates for the TOM include disilver oxide
Ag2O, iridium dioxide,
lanthanum copper selenium oxide LaCuSe0, nickel oxide NiO, ruthenium dioxide,
silver oxide AgO, tristrontium
discandium dicopper disulfur pentoxide [dicopper disulfide-tristrontiurn
discandium pentoxide] Sr3Sc2Ou2S206
[Cu2S2-Sr3Sc206], dicobalt trioxide-nickel oxide, digallium trioxide-tin
dioxide, zinc oxide-beryllium oxide Zn0-
Be0, and zinc oxide-magnesium oxide, some of which are undoped n-type TOO TOM
candidates.
103671 Undoped p-type TOO TOM candidates include certain copper-containing
and silver-containing
delafossite-structured materials having the general formula MaMb03 where the
valence of metal Ma is +1 and
the valence of metal Mb is +3, Ma appearing after Mb when Ma is more
electronegative than Mb. The undoped
copper-containing delafossite-structured materials include chromium copper
dioxide OrCu02, cobalt copper
dioxide CoOu02, copper aluminum dioxide OuA102, copper boron dioxide CuB02,
copper gallium dioxide
CuGa02, copper indium dioxide Culn02, iron copper dioxide FeCu02, scandium
copper dioxide ScCu02, and
yttrium copper dioxide YOu02. The undoped silver-containing delafassite-
structured materials include cobalt
silver dioxide CoAg02, scandium silver dioxide ScAg02, silver aluminum dioxide
AgA102, and silver gallium
dioxide AgGa02.
- 84 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103681 Other undoped p-type TOO TOM candidates include certain copper-
containing dumbbell-
octahedral-structured materials having the general formula McOu202 where the
valence of metal Mc is +2. The
undoped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-structured materials include
barium dicopper dioxide BaCu202,
calcium dicopper dioxide CaCu202, magnesium dicopper dioxide MgCu202, and
strontium dicopper dioxide
SrCu202. Spinel-structured materials dicobalt nickel tetroxide Co2Ni04,
dicobalt zinc tetroxide Co2D04.,
diiridium zinc tetroxide Ir2Zn04, and dirhenium zinc tetroxide Rh2ZnO4 are
undoped p-type TOO TCM
candidates,
103691 A first set of doped p-type TOO TCM candidates consists of zinc
oxide singly doped with certain
elements including antimony, arsenic, bismuth, carbon, cobalt, copper, indium,
lithium, manganese, nitrogen,
phosphorus, potassium, sodium, and silver. A second set of doped p-type TOO
TOM candidates consists of
zinc oxide codoped with two or more of the preceding elements and aluminum,
boron, copper, gallium, tantalum,
and zirconium. Specific p-type dopant combinations for zinc oxide include
aluminum-arsenic, copper-aluminum,
and nitrogen-containing dopant combinations aluminum-nitrogen, boron-nitrogen,
gallium-nitrogen, indium-
nitrogen, lithium-nitrogen, silver-nitrogen, tantalum-nitrogen, and zirconium-
nitrogen.
103701 A third set of doped p-type TOO TOM candidates consists of tin
dioxide singly doped with certain
elements including antimony, cobalt, gallium, indium, lithium, and zinc. A
fourth set of doped p-type TOO TOM
candidates consists of diindium trioxide singly doped with certain elements
including silver and zinc. A fifth set
of doped p-type TOO TOM candidates consists of nickel oxide singly doped with
certain elements including
copper and lithium.
10371] A sixth set of doped p-type TCO TOM candidates consists of zinc
oxide-magnesium oxide singly
doped with certain elements including nitrogen and potassium. Doped p-type TOO
TOM candidates additionally
include aluminum-nitrogen-doped zinc oxide-magnesium oxide ZnO-Mg0:Al-N,
indium-doped molybdenum
trioxide Mo0:eln, indium-gallium-doped tin dioxide Sn02:In-Ga, magnesium-doped
lanthanum copper selenium
oxide LaCuSe0:Mg, magnesium-nitrogen-doped dichromium trioxide [magnesium-
nitrogen-doped chromium
oxide] Cr203:Mg-N, silver-doped dicopper oxide Cu20:Ag, and tin-doped
diantimony tetroxide Sb204:Sn. Some
of the doped p-type TOO TOM candidates are doped n-type TOO TOM candidates.
103721 Doped p-type TOO TOM candidates further include certain copper-
containing delafossite-structured
materials having the general formula CuMb02:Md where the valence of metal Mb
is +3, Cu appearing after Mb
when Cu is more electronegative than Mb, and Md is a dopant, usually a metal.
Doped copper-containing
delafossite-structured materials include calcium-doped copper indium dioxide
0u1n02:Ca, calcium-doped yttrium
copper dioxide YOu02:Ca, iron-doped copper gallium dioxide CuGa02:Fe,
magnesium-doped chromium copper
dioxide CrCu02:Mg, magnesium-doped copper aluminum dioxide CuA102:Mg,
magnesium-doped iron copper
dioxide FeCu02:Mg, magnesium-doped scandium copper dioxide ScCu02:Mg, oxygen-
doped scandium copper
dioxide ScCu02:0, and tin-antimony-doped nickel copper dioxide NiCu02:Sn-Sb.
Other doped p-type TOO
- 85 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
TOM candidates include certain copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-
structured materials McCu202 where the
valence of metal Mc is +2. Doped copper-containing dumbbell-octahedral-
structured materials include barium-
doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu?02:Ba, calcium-doped strontium dicopper
dioxide SrCu202:Ca, and
potassium-doped strontium dicopper dioxide SrCu202:K.
Reflection-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly
103731 CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 can be embodied in various
ways. Four general
embodiments of component 184 are based on changes in light reflection
including light scattering. These four
embodiments are termed the mid-reflection, mixed-reflection RT, mixed-
reflection RN, and deep-reflection
embodiments. None of these embodiments usually employs significant light
emission.
103741 The following preliminary specifications apply to the four
embodiments. Substructure-reflected
ARsb or XRsb light is absent. IS segment 192 reflects ARis light during the
changed state if IS component 182
reflects ARis light during the normal state. XRna and XRne light respectively
reflected by NA segment 214 and
NE segment 234 during the changed state are respectively the same as ARna and
ARne light respectively
reflected by NA layer 204 and NE structure 224 during the normal state. For an
embodiment variation in which
XRna light differs significantly from ARna light and/or XRne light differs
significantly from ARne light, XRna
and/or XRne light are to be respectively substituted for ARna and/or ARne
light in the following material
describing the changed-state operation. Some reflected light invariably leaves
VC region 106 during the normal
state and IDVC portion 138 during the changed state.
103751 The mid-reflection embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection
and temporary XRab light
reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection and
temporary ARne/X.RcIARfe light
reflection respectively due mostly to ARGVARfe light reflection and XRcVXRfe
light reflection. FA layer 206, if
present, is usually not involved in color changing in the mid-reflection
embodiment. There is largely no ARfa or
XRfa light, and thus largely no total ATfa or XTfa light, here.
103761 During the normal state, the mid-reflection embodiment operates as
follows. Core layer 222
normally reflects ARcl light or/and FE structure 226 normally reflects ARfe
light that passes through layer 222.
ARcl or ARfe light, usually ARcl light, is a majority component of A light.
Total ATcl light consists mostly, usually
nearly entirely, of normally reflected ARcl light and any normally reflected
ARfe light passing through layer 222,
typically mostly ARcl light, and is a majority component of A light. Total
ATab light consists mostly, usually
nearly entirely, of ARab light formed with ARcl light passing through NE
structure 224, any ARne light reflected
by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly ARcl
light, and is also a majority component
of A light.
103771 Total ATcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of ARcl
light passing through NA layer 204,
any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and ARfe light passing through
it, again typically mostly ARcl light
- 86 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
Including any ARis light reflected by IS component 182, A light is formed with
ARcl light and any ARis, ARna,
ARne, and ARfe light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
103781 During the changed state, core segment 232 responds to the general
CC control signal applied
between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236
by temporarily reflecting XRcl light
or/and allowing XRfe light temporarily reflected by FE segment 236 to pass
through core segment 232. XRcl or
XRfe light, usually XRcl light, is a majority component of X light. Total XTcl
light consists mostly, usually nearly
entirely, of temporarily reflected XRcl light and any temporarily reflected
XRfe light passing through segment
232, typically mostly XRcl light, and is a majority component of X light.
Total XTab light consists mostly, usually
nearly entirely, of XRab light formed with XRcl light passing through NE
segment 234, any ARne light reflected
by it, and any XRfe light passing through it, likewise typically mostly XRcl
light, and is also a majority component
of X light.
[0379] Total XTcc light consists mostly, usually nearly entirely, of XRcl
light passing through NA segment
214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne and XRfe light passing
through it, again typically mostly XRcl
light. Including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed
with XRcl light and any ARis, ARna,
ARne, and XRfe light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion
138.
10380) Assembly 202 in the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184
may be embodied with one
or more of the following light-processing arrangements: a dipolar suspension
arrangement, an electrochromic
arrangement, an electrofluidic arrangement, an electrophoretic arrangement
(including an electroosmotic
arrangement), an electrowetting arrangement, and a photonic crystal
arrangement.
1038i1 One implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment employs
translation (movement) or/and
rotation of a multiplicity (or set) of particles dispersed, usually laterally
uniformly, in a supporting medium in core
layer 222 for changing the reflection characteristics of core segment 232. The
particles, often titanium dioxide,
are normally distributed or/and oriented in the medium so as to cause layer
222 to normally reflect ARcl light
such that total ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-structure-
reflected ARfe light passing through
layer 222 is at least a majority component of A light. Segment 232 contains a
submultiplicity (or subset) of the
particles. Responsive to the CC control signal, the particles in segment 232
translate or/and rotate for enabling
it to temporarily reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed with
the XRcl light and any FE-segment-
reflected XRfe light passing through segment 232 is at least a majority
component of X light ARcl and XRcl
light are usually respective majority components of A and X light.
103821 In one version of the particle translation or/and rotation
implementation, the particles are charged
particles of largely one color while the supporting medium is a fluid of
largely another color. The fluid is typically
of a color ARclm quite close to normal reflected core color ARcl and having a
majority component of wavelength
suitable for color A. The fluid reflects ARclm light while absorbing or/and
transmitting, preferably absorbing,
other light. The particles are largely of a color XRcim quite close to
temporary reflected core color XRcl and
- 87 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
having a majority component of wavelength suitable for color X. The particles
thereby reflect XRclm light. Color
XRclm, usually lighter than color ARcim here, differs materially from color
ARcIrn.
103831 Setting control voltage VI at normal value Vral laterally along core
layer 222 causes the particles to
be averagely, i.e., on the average, remote from (materially spaced apart from)
NE structure 224. In particular,
the particles are normally dispersed throughout the fluid or situated adjacent
to (close to or adjoining) FE
structure 226. Because the XRclm-colored particles are normally averagely
remote from NE structure 224 and
because the ARclm-colored fluid absorbs or/and transmits light other than
ARclm light, the large majority of both
reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light, formed with ARcl light and any ARfe
light, leaving layer 222 is provided
by reflection of ARcim light off the fluid. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is
largely ARcim light.
103841 The particle charging and the V,K; polarity are chosen such that the
particles in core segment 232
translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 when voltage V,ff along core
segment 232 goes to changed
value Vrc. The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl
light, formed with XRcl light and any
XRfe light, leaving segment 232 is now provided by reflection of XRclm light
off the particles in segment 232.
XTcl light leaving segment 232 is largely XRclm light. Since color XRclm
differs materially from color ARclm,
temporary reflected core color XRcl differs materially from normal reflected
core color ARcl. The same result is
achieved by reversing both the particle charging and the VrifC polarity.
103851 The fluid can alternatively be of color XRclm. If so, the fluid
reflects XRclm light and absorbs or/and
transmits, preferably absorbs, other light. The particles are of color ARclm
usually now lighter than color XRclm,
and either the particle charging or the Vfc polarity is reversed from that
just described. The ARclm-colored
particles are normally adjacent to NE structure 224. The large majority of
both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl
light is provided by reflection of ARcim light off the particles. ATcl light
leaving core layer 222 is again largely
ARcim light.
103861 Changing voltage VI in core segment 232 to value Vnic causes the
particles in segment 232 to
translate materially away from NE segment 234 so as to be dispersed throughout
the segment of the fluid in
core segment 232 or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. Because the particles
in core segment 232 are now
averagely remote from NE segment 234 and because the XRclm-colored fluid
absorbs non-XRclm light, the
large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is provided
by reflection of XRclm light off the fluid
in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is again largely XRclm
light. With color XRclm differing
materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl again differs
materially from normal reflected
core color ARcl. The same result is achieved by reversing both the particle
charging and the Vfc polarity.
103871 The particles in another version of the particle translation or/and
rotation implementation consist of
two groups of particles of different colors. The supporting medium is a
transparent fluid, typically a liquid. The
particles in one group are typically largely of color ARclm while the
particles in the other group are largely of
color XRclm. The particles have characteristics which enable the ARcitn-
colored particles to translate oppositely
- 88 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
to the XRclm-colored particles in the presence of an electric field. The
particles can be charged so that the
XRclm-colored particles are charged oppositely to the ARcIrri-colored
particles. The charge on each XRclm-
colored particle can be of the same magnitude as, or a different magnitude
than, the charge on each ARclm-
colored particle.
103881 The VoN polarity and particle characteristics, e.g., particle
charging, are chosen such that setting
voltage VI at normal value Vr.rig laterally along core layer 222 causes the
ARclm-colored particles to be adjacent
to NE structure 224 while the XRclm-colored particles are averagely remote
from structure 224. The large
majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl light is normally
provided by reflection of ARcIrn light off the
ARclm-colored particles. ATcl light leaving layer 222 is largely ARclm light.
103891 Changing voltage V,,, in core segment 232 to value Vnfc at a
polarity opposite value VnfN causes the
XRclm-colored particles in segment 232 to translate so as to be adjacent to NE
segment 234 while the ARcIrn-
colored particles in core segment 232 translate so as to be averagely remote
from segment 234. The large
majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is now provided by
reflection of XRclm light off the
XRclm-colored particles in core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is
largely XRclm light. Since color
XRclm differs materially from color ARclm, temporary reflected core color XRcl
differs materially from normal
reflected core color ARcl.
103901 The ARcim light reflected by the ARclm-colored particles can be
specularly reflected, scattered, or
a combination of specularly reflected and scattered. The same applies to the
XRclm light reflected by the
XRcim-colored particles. The radiosity of the reflected ARclm or XRclm light
can be very low such that color
ARclm or XRclm is quite dark, sometimes nearly black. If so, the ARclm-colored
or XRclm-colored particles
absorb the large majority of incident light.
10391j Different selections of particle coloring can be made in combination
with aitering other particle
characteristics. In one example, the particles in one group are of color ARclm
while the particles in the other
group are of a color Fl Rc significantly different from colors ARcl and XRcl.
The Fl Rc-colored particles reflect
Fl Rc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light. The particles
have characteristics enabling the
ARclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in the presence
of an electric field that changes
polarity while the Fl Rc-colored particles translate, to the extent possible,
toward or away from structure 224
depending on the field polarity. The Fl Rc particles can be charged while the
ARclm-colored particles are largely
uncharged but have physical properties attracting them to structure 224.
103921 The Voil polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that
setting voltage Vni at normal
value V.1 laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARcim-colored particles
to be adjacent to NE structure 224
while the FiRc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224. The
large majority of both reflected
ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARcIrn light off
the ARcIrn-colored particles. ATcl light
leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
- 89 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
103931 The Vrc polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such that
setting voltage \int at normal
value VIN laterally across core layer 222 causes the ARclm-colored particles
to be adjacent to NE structure 224
while the Fl Rc-colored particles are averagely remote from structure 224. The
large majority of both reflected
ARcl light and total ATcl light is provided by reflection of ARclm light off
the ARclm-colored particles. ATel light
leaving layer 222 is again largely ARclm light.
[0394] In a complementary example, the particles in one group are of color
XRclm while the particles in
the other group are of a color GlRe significantly different from colors ARcl
and XRcl. The G1 Re-colored
particles reflect GiRc light considerably different from ARcl and XRcl light.
The particles have characteristics
enabling the XRclm-colored particles to remain adjacent to NE structure 224 in
the presence of an electric field
that changes polarity while the GlRe-colored particles translate, to the
extent possible, toward or away from
structure 224 depending on the field polarity. The GiRc-colored particles can
be charged while the XRclm-
colored particles are largely uncharged but have physical properties
attracting them to structure 224.
103951 The \Inns! polarity and particle characteristics are chosen such
that setting voltage Vrif at normal
value VrIfF4 laterally across core layer 222 causes both the XRclm-colored and
Cl Rc-colored particles to be
adjacent to NE structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light
and total ATcl light is then normally
provided by reflection of GlRe and XRclm light off both the G1Rc-colored and
XRclm-colored particles. ATel
light leaving layer 222 consists of a G1Rc and XRclm light The ATcl
combination of G1Rc and XRclm light is
chosen to differ materially from XRcl light and, in particular, to have a
majority component suitable for color A.
103961 Changing voltage Vt in core segment 232 to value \iinfc of opposite
polarity to value Vriftl causes the
G1Rc-colored particles to translate materially away from NE segment 234 so as
to be averagely remote from
segment 234 while the XRclm-colored particles remain adjacent to segment 234.
The large majority of both
reflected XRcl light and total XTcl light is provided by reflection of XRclm
light off the XRclm-colored particles in
core segment 232. XTcl light leaving segment 232 is again largely XRclm light.
Since the ARcl light
combination of G1Rc and XRclm light differs materially from XRcl light,
temporary core color XRcl differs
materially from normal core color ARcl.
103971 In a further version of the particle translation or/and rotation
implementation, the surface of each
particle consists of two portions of different colors. The particles are
optically and electrically anisotropic. The
optical anisotropicity is achieved by arranging for the outer surface of each
particle to consist of one SF portion
of color ARclm and another SF portion of color XRclm. The two SF portions are
usually of approximately the
same area. The particles can be generally spherical with the two SF portions
of each particle being
hemispherical surfaces. The electrical anisotropicity is achieved by providing
the two SF portions of each
particle with different zeta potentials. Each particle is usually a dipole
with one SF portion negatively charged
and the other positively charged. The supporting medium is a solid transparent
sheet having cavities in which
- 90 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
the particles are respectively located. Each cavity is slightly larger than
its particle. The part of each cavity
outside its particle is filled with transparent dielectric fluid for enabling
each particle to rotate freely in its cavity.
103981 Voltage values VIN and V0 are chosen so that one is positive and the
other is negative. If value
VniN is positive, the ARclm-colored SF portions are negatively charged while
the XRclm-colored SF portions are
positively charged. The opposite surface-portion charging is used if value
V,,,r4 is positive. Either way, setting
voltage VI at normal value linfN causes the particles to rotate so that their
ARclm-colored SF portions face NE
structure 224. The large majority of both reflected ARcl light and total ATcl
light is provided by reflection of
ARclm light off the ARcIrn-colored SF portions of the particles. ATcl light
leaving core layer 222 is largely ARcirn
light.
103991 Applying the general CC control signal to core segment 232 so that
voltage \int is at changed value
Voc across segment 232 causes the particles in it to rotate so that their XRcl-
colored SF portions face NE
segment 234. The large majority of both reflected XRcl light and total XTcl
light is now provided by reflection of
XRclm light off the XRcl-colored SF portions of the particles in core segment
232. XTcl light leaving segment
232 is largely XRclm light. With color XRclm differing materially from color
ARcim, temporary core color XRcl
differs materially from normal core color ARcl.
10400) During the changed state in all three versions of the particle
translation or/and rotation
implementation, the particles in the remainder of core layer 222 largely
maintain the particle orientations or/and
average locations existent during the normal state. The large majority of both
reflected light and total light
leaving the remainder of layer 222 consists of reflected ARclm light or, in
the last-mentioned example of the
version using two groups of particles of different colors, a reflected
combination of XRclm and G1Rc light
identical to that normally present and thereby forming ARcl light.
10401j Another implementation of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC
component 184 entails changing
the absorption characteristics of particles dispersed, usually uniformly, in a
supporting medium usually a fluid
such as a liquid in which the particles are suspended. In one version, the
particles normally absorb much,
usually most, of the light striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally
leaves layer 222. The particles in core
segment 232 respond to the general CC control signal by scattering much,
usually most, of the light striking print
area 118. This causes XTcl light, including XRcl light, to temporarily leave
segment 232. Alternatively, the
particles in layer 222 normally scatter much, usually most, of the light
striking zone 112 so that ATcl light,
including ARcl light, normally leaves layer 222. The particles in segment 232
respond to the control signal by
absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area 118 for causing XTcl
light to temporarily leave segment
232.
10402) The particles in core layer 222 in another version of the absorption-
characteristics-changing
implementation are elongated dichroic particles normally at largely random
orientations with largely no electric
field existing across layer 222. The particles in layer 222 normally absorb
much, usually most, of the light
- 91 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/U S2017/(157934
striking SF zone 112 so that ATcl light normally leaves layer 222. Responsive
to the general CC control signal,
the particles in core segment 232 align generally with an electric field
produced across segment 232. Much,
usually most, of the light striking print area 118 is transmitted through
segment 232 for causing XTcl light,
including reflected XRfe light, to temporarily leave segment 232.
Alternatively, an electric field normally exists
across all of layer 222. The particles in layer 222 align with the electric
field for enabling much, usually most, of
the light striking zone 112 to be transmitted through layer 222 so that ATcl
light, including reflected ARfe light,
normally leaves layer 222. In response to the control signal, the particles in
segment 232 become largely
randomly oriented for absorbing much, usually most, of the light striking area
118. XTcl light temporarily leaves
segment 232.
10403j Core layer 222 in a further implementation, an example being an
electrowefting or electrofluidic
arrangement, of the mid-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs a
liquid whose shape is suitably
manipulated to change the layer's reflection characteristics. The liquid is in
a first shape for causing layer 222 to
reflect ARcl light such that ATcl light formed with the ARcl light and any FE-
structure-reflected ARfe light passing
through layer 222 is a majority component of A light. Responsive to the
general CC control signal, the liquid in
core segment 232 temporarily changes to a second shape materially different
from the first shape in segment
232 for causing it to reflect XRcl light such that total XTcl light formed
with XRcl light and any FE-segment-
reflected XRfe light passes through segment 232 and is a majority component of
X light. Exemplary shapes for
the liquid are described in U.S. Patents 6,917,456 B2, 7,463,398 B2, and
7,508,566 B2, contents incorporated
by reference herein. Three major versions of the liquid shape-changing
implementation entail arranging for (a)
ARcl light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a
majority component of X light, (b) ARcl
light to be a majority component of A light with XRfe light being a majority
component of X light, and (c) ARfe
light to be a majority component of A light with XRcl light being a majority
component of X light.
10404j Turning to the two mixed-reflection embodiments of CC component 184,
each mixed-reflection
embodiment utilizes FA layer 206 for reflecting light in achieving color
changing. Light striking core layer 222
along NE structure 224 passes through layer 222 to FE structure 226 at
selected thickness locations along layer
222 at certain times and is blocked, i.e., reflected or/and absorbed, by layer
222 at other times. Light passing
through selected thickness locations of layer 222 then passes through
corresponding thickness locations of
structure 226 and undergoes substantial reflection at corresponding thickness
locations of FA layer 206.
Resultant reflected light passes back through structure 226 and core layer
222. Assembly 202 functions as a
light valve. The difference between the mixed-reflection embodiments is that
FA layer 206 reflects light only
during the changed state in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment and only in the
normal state in the mixed-
reflection RN embodiment.
104051 The mixed-reflection RT embodiment employs normal ARab light
reflection and temporary
XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe light
reflection and temporary
ARne/XRcI/XRfeIXRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARcliARfe
light reflection and XRfa light
- 92 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
reflection. During the normal state, the mixed-reflection RT embodiment
operates the same as the mid-
reflection embodiment.
104061 Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RT embodiment responds to
the general CC control
signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode
segments 234 and 236 during the changed
state by allowing a substantial part of light striking print area 118 and
passing through IS segment 192, NA
segment 214, and NE segment 234 to temporarily pass through core segment 232
such that a substantial part of
that light passes through FE segment 236. FA segment 216 temporarily reflects
XRfa light, a majority
component of X light. Total XTfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of
temporarily reflected XRfa light.
104071 A substantial part of the XRfa light passes through FE segment 236
and, as also allowed by core
segment 232, passes through it Total Vicl light consists of XRfa light passing
through segment 232, any XRcl
light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through
it, mostly reflected XRfa light.
Total )(Tab light consists of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and
any XRab light formed with any
ARne light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing
through it, likewise mostly XRfa light.
Total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through NA segment 214, any
ARna light reflected by it, and any
ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again mostly XRfa light.
Including any ARis light reflected by IS
segment 192, X light is formed with XRfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl,
and XRfe light temporarily
leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
104081 The mixed-reflection RN embodiment employs normal ARabiARfa light
reflection and temporary
XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light
reflection and temporary
ARne/XRcIARfe light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa light
reflection and XRclIX.Rfe light reflection.
During the normal state, core layer 222 allows light striking SF zone 112 and
passing through IS component
182, NA layer 204, and NE structure 224 to normally pass through core layer
222 such that a substantial part of
that light normally passes through FE structure 226. FA layer 206 reflects
ARfa light, a majority component of A
light. Total ATfa light consists mostly, preferably only, of normally
reflected ARfa light.
104091 A substantial part of the ARfa light passes through FE structure 226
and, as also allowed by core
layer 222, passes through it. Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light passing
through layer 222, any ARcl light
reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it,
mostly reflected ARfa light. Total
ATab light consists of ARfa light passing through NE structure 224 and any
ARab light formed with any ARne
light reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through
it, likewise mostly ARfa light. Total
ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light
reflected by it, and any ARne,
ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including
any ARis light reflected by IS
component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne,
ARcl, and ARfe light normally
leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
- 93 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
104101 Core segment 232 in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment responds to
the general CC control
signal the same as in the mid-reflection embodiment. Accordingly, the mixed-
reflection RN embodiment
operates the same in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104111 In one version of each mixed-reflection embodiment of CC component
184, core layer 222 contains
core particles distributed laterally across the layer's extent and switchable
between light-transmissive and light-
blocking states. NA layer 204 may be present or absent. FA layer 206 contains
a light reflector extending
along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226. The light reflector may be
a specular (mirror-like) reflector or
a diffuse reflector that reflectively scatters light.
104121 The core particles are usually dimensionally anisotrapic, each
particle typically shaped generally
like a rod or a sheet. For a rod-shaped core particle having (a) a maximum
dimension, termed the long
dimension, (b) a shorter dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the
first short dimension, in a plane
perpendicular to the long dimension, and (c) another shorter dimension which
extends perpendicular to the other
two dimensions and which reaches a maximum value, termed the second short
dimension, no greater than the
first short dimension, the long dimension is at least twice, preferably at
least four times, more preferably at least
eight times, the first short dimension. For a sheet-shaped core particle
having (a) a maximum dimension,
termed the first long dimension, (b) another dimension which reaches a maximum
value, termed the second long
dimension, no greater than the first long dimension in a plane perpendicular
to the first long dimension, and (c) a
shorter dimension which reaches a maximum value, termed the short dimension,
and which extends
perpendicular to the other two dimensions, the first long dimension is at
least twice, preferably at least four
times, more preferably at least eight times, the short dimension.
104131 The core particles in core layer 222 in the mixed-reflection RT
version are normally oriented largely
randomly relative to electrode structures 224 and 226. This enables the core
particles in layer 222 to absorb
or/and scatter light striking it along NE structure 224. Either way, light
striking SF zone 112 and passing through
IS component 182 and NA layer 204 so as to strike core layer 222 along
structure 224 is normally blocked from
passing through layer 222. Total ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists of any
ARcl light reflected by it and any
FE-structure-reflected ARfe light passing through it.
104141 Applying the general CC control signal to AB segment 212 in the
mixed-reflection RT version
causes the core particles in core segment 232 to orient themselves generally
perpendicular to electrode
segments 234 and 236. In particular, the long dimension of a rod-shaped core
particle extends generally
perpendicular to segments 234 and 236 while one of the long dimensions of a
sheet-shaped core particle
extends generally perpendicular to segments 234 and 236 so that the general
plane of the sheet-shaped particle
is perpendicular to segments 234 and 236. This orientation enables light
striking print area 118 and passing
through IS segment 192 and NA segment 214 so as to strike core segment 232
along NE segment 234 to be
temporarily transmitted through core segment 232 and reflected by the segment
of the light reflector in FA
- 94 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
segment 216. The temporarily reflected XRfa light passes in substantial part
back through core segment 232.
Total XTcl light leaving segment 232 consists of XRfa light passing through
it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and
any FE-segment-reflected XRfe light passing through it.
104I5] Essentially the reverse occurs in the mixed-reflection RN version.
The core particles present in
core layer 222 are normally oriented generally perpendicular to electrode
structures 224 and 226. Specifically,
the long dimension of a rod-shaped core particle extends generally
perpendicular to structures 224 and 226
while one of the long dimensions of a sheet-shaped core particle extends
generally perpendicular to structures
224 and 226 so that the general plane of the sheet-shaped particle is
perpendicular to structures 224 and 226.
Light striking SF zone 112 and passing through IS component 182 and NA layer
204 so as to strike core layer
222 along NE structure 224 is transmitted through layer 222 and reflected by
the light reflector. The normally
reflected ARfa light passes in substantial part back through layer 222. Total
ATcl light leaving layer 222 consists
of ARfa light passing through it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-
structure-reflected ARfe light passing
through it.
104161 Applying the general CC control signal to AB segment 212 in the
mixed-reflection RN version
causes the core particles in core segment 232 to become randomly oriented
relative to electrode segments 234
and 236. Light striking print area 118 and passing through IS segment 192 and
NA segment 214 so as to strike
core segment 232 along NE segment 234 is largely scattered or/and absorbed by
the core particles in core
segment 232 and is thereby blocked from passing through segment 232. Total
XTcl light leaving segment 232
consists of any XRcl light reflected by it and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe
light passing through it.
104171 Core layer 222 consists of liquid-crystal material formed with
elongated liquid-crystal molecules that
constitute the core particles in another version of the mixed-reflection RT or
RN embodiment of CC component
184 where it is a reflective liquid-crystal arrangement, usually polarizer-
free. "LC" hereafter means liquid-crystal.
The LC molecules, which switch between light-transmissive and light-scattering
states, can employ various LC
phases such as nematic, smectic, and chiral. The LC material typically has no
pre-established twist. For this
purpose, the surfaces of electrode structures 224 and 226 along layer 222 are
preferably flat rather than
grooved.
[04181 The reflected XRfa or ARfa light in each LC version of the mixed-
reflection RT or RN embodiment
usually appears along NE structure 224 as a dark color but, depending on the
constituency of core layer 222,
can appear along structure 224 as a light color. The dark color can be largely
black. The scattered ARcl or
XRcl light usually appears along NE structure 224 as a light color but,
likewise depending on the constituency of
layer 222, can appear along structure 224 as a dark color. The light color can
be white or largely white.
104191 In a further version of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment of
CC component 184, core layer
222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which dipolar particles
constituting the core particles are colloidally
suspended. The dipolar particles, usually dichroic, can be elongated rod-like
particles or flat sheet-like particles.
- 95 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
Each dipole particle has a positively charged end and a negatively charged
end. Voltage Vnf across opposite
segments of electrode structures 224 and 226 is usually largely zero when the
intervening dipole particles are
randomly oriented so as to scatter or/and absorb light striking them.
Adjusting voltage V,:t across opposite
segments of structures 224 and 226 to a non-zero value causes the intervening
dipole particles to align
generally perpendicular to those two electrode segments with the positively
charged end of each intervening
dipolar particle closest to the more negative one of the electrode segments
and vice versa.
104201 Various color combinations are available with the dipolar-particle
suspension. Subject to a dark
color being produced along NE structure 224 if the dipolar particles in core
layer 222 or core segment 232
absorb incident light due to being randomly oriented relative to electrode
structures 224 and 226, the scattered
ARcl or XRcl light in each mixed-reflection version can appear along NE
structure 224 as a light color, or as a
dark color, if the dipolar particles across layer 222 or in segment 232
scatter incident light due to being randomly
oriented relative to structures 224 and 226. The reflected XRfa or ARfa light
correspondingly appears along NE
structure 224 as a dark color, or as a light color, depending on the
characteristics of the light reflector.
104211 The deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 employs normal
ARab/ARfa light reflection
and temporary XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal
ARne/ARcl/ARfe/ARfa light reflection and
temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due mostly to ARfa
light reflection and XRia light
reflection. Light striking SF zone 112 passes through IS component 182, NA
layer 204, NE structure 224, core
layer 222, and FE structure 226, is reflected by FA layer 206, and then passes
back through subcomponents
226, 222, 224, and 182. Core layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206
usually impose certain traits, e.g.,
wavelength-independent traits such as polarization traits, on the light. "WI'
hereafter means wavelength-
independent.
104221 When WI traits are employed, the deep-reflection embodiment operates
as follows during the
normal state. NA layer 204 typically imposes a WI NA incoming trait on light
normally passing from IS
component 182 through layer 204 so that the light has the NA incoming trait
upon reaching core layer 222, "NA"
again meaning near auxiliary. Layer 222 imposes a WI primary incoming trait on
light normally passing from NE
structure 224 through layer 222 so that the light has the primary incoming
trait upon reaching FA layer 206. The
primary incoming trait usually differs materially from the NA incoming trait,
104231 FA layer 206 normally reflects ARfa light, a majority component of A
light, so that total ATfa light
consists mostly, preferably only, of normally reflected ARfa light. As an
adjunct to reflecting ARfa light, layer 206
typically imposes a WI FA trait on ARfa light leaving layer 206 along FE
structure 226, "FA" again meaning far
auxiliary. The FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after
reflection by layer 206. The FA trait can be
the same as, or significantly different from, the NA incoming trait.
104241 The ARfa light passes in substantial part through FE structure 226.
Total ATfe light consists of
ARfa light passing through structure 226 and any ARfe light reflected by it,
mostly ARfa light having the FA trait.
- 96 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
The A-Fie light passes in substantial part through core layer 222 and NE
structure 224. In transmitting ATfe light,
layer 222 imposes a WI primary outgoing trait on ATfe light passing from FE
structure 226 through layer 222 so
that the ATfe light has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204.
The primary outgoing and
incoming traits are usually the same. Total ATcl light consists of ARfa light
passing through core layer 222, any
ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe light passing through it, mostly ARfa
light having the primary outgoing
trait. The ATcl light passes in substantial part through NE structure 224.
Total ATab light consists of ARfa light
passing through structure 224 and any ARab light formed with any ARne light
reflected by structure 224 and any
ARcl and ARfe light passing through it, likewise mostly ARfa light.
104251 The ATab light passes in substantial part through NA layer 204 and
IS component 182. If the NA
incoming trait is imposed on light passing from component 182 through layer
204, layer 204 usually imposes a
WI NA outgoing trait on ATab light passing from NE structure 224 through layer
204 so that ATab light has the
NA outgoing trait upon reaching component 182. The NA outgoing and incoming
traits are usually the same.
Total ATcc light consists of ARfa light passing through layer 204, any ARna
light reflected by it, and any ARne,
ARcl, and ARfe light passing through it, again mostly ARfa light. Including
any ARis light normally reflected by
component 182, A light is formed with ARfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne,
ARcl, and ARfe light normally
leaving component 182 and thus VC region 106.
104261 Core segment 232 in the deep-reflection embodiment responds to the
general CC control signal
applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234
and 236 by causing light passing
from NE segment 234 through core segment 232 to be temporarily of a WI changed
incoming trait such that the
light has the changed incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. More
particularly, if NA layer 204 imposes
the NA incoming trait on light normally passing from IS component 182 through
layer 204, NA segment 214
imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192 through
segment 214 so that the light has
the NA incoming trait upon reaching core segment 232. Segment 232 then imposes
the changed incoming trait
on light temporarily passing from NE segment 234 through segment 232 so that
the light has the changed
incoming trait upon reaching FA segment 216. The changed incoming trait
differs materially from the primary
incoming trait.
104271 FA segment 216 temporarily reflects XRfa light, a majority component
of X light, so that total XTfa
light consists mostly, preferably only, of temporarily reflected XRfa light.
Although the primary and changed
incoming traits are independent of wavelength, the material difference between
them is chosen to cause color
XRfa to differ materially from color ARfa. More specifically, colors ARfa and
XRfa usually have the same
wavelength characteristics but differ materially in radiosity so as to differ
materially in lightness/darkness and
therefore materially in color. Core segment 232 and AB segment 212 function as
a light valve in producing the
color difference. In the course of reflecting XRfa light, FA segment 216
imposes the FA trait on XRfa light
leaving it along FE segment 236 if FA layer 206 imposes the FA trait on ARfa
light leaving layer 206 along FE
structure 226. The FA trait is usually applied to light just before and after
reflection by FA segment 216.
- 97 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
104281 The XRfa light passes in substantial part through FE segment 236.
Total XTfe light consists of
XRfa light passing through segment 236 and any XRfe light reflected by it,
mostly XRfa light having the FA trait.
The XTfe light passes in substantial part through core segment 232. In
transmitting XTfe light, segment 232
imposes a WI changed outgoing trait on XTfe light passing from FE segment 236
through segment 232 so that
the XTfe light has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214.
The changed outgoing trait,
usually the same as the changed incoming trait, differs materially from the
primary incoming and outgoing traits.
Total XTcl light consists of XRfa light passing through core segment 232, any
XRcl light reflected by it, and any
XRfe light passing through it, mostly XRfa light now having the changed
outgoing trait. Any XRcl light is usually
largely ARcl light. The XTcl light passes in substantial part through NA
segment 214. Total XTab light consists
of XRfa light passing through NE segment 234 and any XRab light formed with
any ARne light reflected by
segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise mostly
XRfa light.
104291 The XTab light passes in substantial part through NA segment 214 and
IS segment 192. If NA
segment 214 imposes the NA incoming trait on light passing from IS segment 192
through NA segment 214,
segment 214 imposes the NA outgoing trait on XTab light passing from NE
segment 234 through segment 214
so that XTab light has the NA outgoing trait upon reaching IS segment 192.
Including any ARna light reflected
by NA segment 214, total XTcc light consists of XRfa light passing through
segment 214, any ARna light
reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light passing through it, again
mostly XRfa light. Similarly
including any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with
XRfa light and any ARis, ARna,
ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion 138.
104301 The deep-reflection embodiment of CC component 184 is typically a
reflective LC structure in which
core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as nematic liquid crystal
formed with elongated LC particles.
FA layer 206 contains a light reflector extending along, and generally
parallel to, FE structure 226. The light
reflector, specular or diffuse, is designed to reflect ARfa light during the
normal state such that the segment of
the light reflector in FA segment 216 reflects XRfa light during the changed
state. The reflector is a white-light
reflector if one of colors ARfa and XRfa is white. If neither is white, the
reflector can be a color reflector or a
white-light reflector and a color filter lying between the white-light
reflector and structure 226.
104311 NA layer 204 usually contains a near (first) plane polarizer
extending along, and generally parallel
to, NE structure 224. If so, FA layer 206 contains a far (second) plane
polarizer extending along, and generally
parallel to, FE structure 226 so as to extend generally parallel to the near
polarizer. The far polarizer is located
between structure 226 and the light reflector.
104321 Each polarizer has a polarization direction parallel to the plane of
that polarizer. "PZ" hereafter
means polarization. The PZ direction of the near polarizer is termed the p
direction. The direction parallel to the
plane of the near polarizer and perpendicular to the p direction is termed the
s direction, The PZ direction of the
far polarizer is typically perpendicular to, or parallel to, the near
polarizer's PZ direction but can be at a non-zero
- 98 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
angle materially different from 90' to the PZ direction. In the following
description of the operation of the
reflective LC structure, the polarizers have perpendicular PZ directions so
that the far polarizer's PZ direction is
the s direction.
104331 Relative to the near polarizer, incoming light striking NA layer 204
consists of a p directional
component and an s directional component. For each color A or X, the near
polarizer transmits a high
percentage, usually at least 70%, preferably at least 80%, more preferably at
least 90%, even more preferably at
least 95%, of the p component and blocks, preferably absorbs, the s component.
Light passing through the near
polarizer so as to strike assembly 202 is plane polarized in the PZ direction
of the near polarizer, i.e., the p
direction. The plane polarized light passes in substantial part through the LC
material.
104341 The elongated particles of the LC material in core layer 222 are
normally in an orientation which
causes the PZ direction of incoming incident p polarized light to rotate a
primary LC amount so that the
transmitted light leaving the LC material and striking the far polarizer is
plane polarized in a direction materially
different from the p direction. The primary LC amount of the PZ direction
rotation is usually 45 - 90' for which
an actual PZ direction rotation of greater than 360' is converted to an
effective PZ direction rotation by
subtracting 360' one or more times until the resultant rotation value is less
than 360 . For each color A or X,
the far polarizer transmits a high percentage, usually at least 70%,
preferably at least 80%, more preferably at
least 90%, even more preferably at least 95% of incident s polarized light and
blocks, preferably absorbs, any
other incident light. The radiosity of the s polarized light passing through
the far polarizer increases as the
effective PZ direction rotation provided by the LC material moves toward 90'.
104351 A substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the
far polarizer is normally reflected
by the light reflector and passes back through the far polarizer, the LC
material, and the near polarizer. The far
polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane
polarized in any direction other than the s
direction so that reflected light passing through the far polarizer largely
forms ARfa light plane polarized in the s
direction. The LC material causes reflected incident s polarized ARfa light to
undergo a rotation in PZ direction
largely equal to the primary LC amount. The near polarizer blocks, preferably
absorbs, any reflected incident
light plane polarized in largely any direction other than the p direction so
that reflected light passing through the
near polarizer includes ARfa light plane polarized in the p direction. The
radiosity of the reflected p polarized
ARfa light passing through the near polarizer increases as the effective PZ
direction rotation provided by the LC
material moves toward 90'.
(04361 Core segment 232 responds to the general CC control signal provided
during the changed state by
causing the LC particles in segment 232 to change to an orientation materially
different from their orientation in
the normal state such that incoming plane polarized light passing through
segment 232 and striking the segment
of the far polarizer in segment 216 of FA layer 206 is plane polarized in a
materially different direction than
incoming plane polarized light passing through core layer 222 and striking the
far polarizer during the normal
- 99 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/(157934
state. The LC-particle orientation change in core segment 232 may entail
rotating the PZ direction of plane
polarized light passing through segment 232 by a changed LC rotational amount
usually less than 450. If so, the
effective PZ direction rotation provided by segment 232 during the changed
state is materially different from,
usually materially less than, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by
layer 222 during the normal state.
104371 During the changed state, the far polarizer segment in FA segment
216 transmits a high
percentage of incident polarized light plane polarized in the s direction and
blocks, preferably absorbs, incident
light plane polarized in largely any other direction just as in the normal
state. However, the radiosity of the
reflected s polarized light temporarily passing through the far polarizer
segment in FA segment 216 differs
materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the
reflected s polarized light normally passing
through the far polarizer because the effective PZ direction rotation, if any,
temporarily provided by the LC
material in core segment 232 differs materially from, is usually materially
less than, the effective PZ direction
rotation normally provided by the LC material in core layer 222.
10438) A substantial part of the plane polarized light passing through the
far polarizer segment in FA
segment 216 during the changed state is reflected by the segment of the light
reflector in FA segment 216 and
passes back through the far polarizer segment in segment 216, core segment
232, and the segment of the near
polarizer in NA segment 214. The far polarizer segment in FA segment 216
blocks, preferably absorbs, any
reflected incident light plane polarized in any direction other than the s
direction so that reflected light passing
through the far polarizer segment in segment 216 largely forms XRfa light
plane polarized in the s direction. To
the extent that the PZ direction of incoming p polarized XRfa light leaving
the near polarizer segment in NA
segment 214 temporarily undergoes rotation, the LC material in core segment
232 causes reflected incident s
polarized XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction. The near
polarizer segment in NA segment
214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any reflected incident light plane polarized
in any direction other than the p
direction so that reflected light passing through the near polarizer segment
in NA segment 214 includes XRfa
light plane polarized in the p direction.
104391 The radiosity of the reflected p plane polarized XRfa light
temporarily passing through the near
polarizer segment in NA segment 214 differs materially from, is usually
materially less than, the radiosity of the
reflected p plane polarized ARfa light normally passing through the near
polarizer because the radiosity of the
reflected s plane polarized XRfa light temporarily passing through the far
polarizer segment in FA segment 216
differs materially from, is usually materially less than, the radiosity of the
reflected s plane polarized ARfa light
normally passing through the far polarizer due to the effective PZ direction
rotation, if any, temporarily provided
by core segment 232 differing materially from, usually being materially less
than, the effective PZ direction
rotation normally provided by core layer 222. Colors ARfa and XRfa normally
have the same wavelength
characteristics. However, the material difference in radiosity between the
resultant reflected p plane polarized
XRfa light temporarily leaving NA segment 214 and the resultant reflected p
plane polarized ARfa light normally
leaving NA layer 204 by itself, or in combination with other reflected light
leaving print area 118 during the
- .100 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
changed state and SF zone 112 during the normal state enables color X to
differ materially from color A. With
color XRfa being of materially lower radiosity than color ARfa, color X is
materially lighter than color A even
though the wavelength characteristics of ARfa and XRfa light are the same. For
instance, color X can be pink
while color A is red.
104401 The WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment are embodied as
follows in the reflective LC
structure with the polarizers having perpendicular PZ directions. For the NA
incoming and outgoing traits, the
near polarizer causes light passing either way through NA layer 204 to be
plane polarized in the p direction. For
the FA trait, the far polarizer causes light passing either way through the FA
layer 206 to be plane polarized in
the s direction. For the primary incoming and outgoing traits, the LC material
in core layer 222 causes the PZ
direction of plane polarized light passing either way through layer 222 during
the normal state to rotate the
primary LC rotational amount, usually 45' - 90'. For the changed incoming and
outgoing traits, the segment of
the LC material in core segment 232 causes the PZ direction of light passing
through segment 232 during the
changed state to rotate the changed LC rotational amount, usually less than 45
, if the LC material in segment
232 undergoes any PZ direction rotation during the changed state.
104411 When the polarizers in the reflective LC structure have parallel PZ
directions with the near polarizer
causing light passing either way through NA layer 204 to be plane polarized in
the p direction, the actions
performed by the far polarizer and the LC material during the normal and
changed states are opposite from the
actions performed by the far polarizer and the LC material when the polarizers
in the reflective LC structure have
perpendicular PZ directions. The WI traits in the deep-reflection embodiment
are then embodied as follows. For
the FA trait, the far polarizer causes light passing either way through FA
layer 206 to be plane polarized in the p
direction. For the primary incoming and outgoing traits, the LC material in
core layer 222 causes the PZ
direction of plane polarized light normally passing either way through layer
222 to rotate a primary LC amount,
usually less than 45', if the LC material in layer 222 normally undergoes any
PZ direction rotation. For the
changed incoming and outgoing traits, the segment of the LC material in core
segment 232 causes the PZ
direction of light temporarily passing through segment 232 to rotate a changed
LC amount, usually 45 - 90 .
Emission-based Embodiments of Color-change Component with Electrode Assembly
104421 Six general embodiments of CC component 184 in 01 structure 200 are
based on changes in light
emission. These six embodiments are termed the mid-emission ET, mid-emission
EN, mid-emission EN-ET,
deep-emission ET, deep-emission EN, and deep-emission EN-ET embodiments. The
above-described
preliminary specifications for the four CC-component light-reflection
embodiments apply to these six CC-
component light-emission embodiments.
104431 Beginning with the three mid-emission embodiments of CC component
184, FA layer 206 is not
significantly involved in color changing in any of the mid-emission
embodiments. There is largely no ARfa, AEfa,
-101 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
XRfa, or XEfa light, and thus largely no ADfa, ATfa, XDfa, or XTfa light, in
any of the mid-emission
embodiments. The difference between the two single mid-emission embodiments is
that core layer 222 emits
light only during the changed state in the mid-emission ET embodiment and only
during the normal state in the
mid-emission EN embodiment. Layer 222 emits light during both states in the
mid-emission EN-ET
embodiment
[04441 The mid-emission ET embodiment utilizes normal ARab light reflection
and temporary XEab light
emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal ARne/ARcliARfe
light reflection and temporary XEcl
light emission-ARne/XRcUXRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to
ARcVARfe light reflection and XEcl light
emission. During the normal state, the mid-emission ET embodiment operates the
same as the mixed-reflection
RT embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104451 During the changed state, core segment 232 in the mid-emission ET
embodiment responds to the
general CC control signal applied between at least oppositely situated parts
of electrode segments 234 and 236
by temporarily emitting XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light.
Total XTcl light consists of XEcl light,
any XRcl light reflected by segment 232, and any FE-segment-reflected XRfe
light passing through it, usually
mostly temporarily emitted XEcl light. Any reflected XRcl light is usually
largely ARcl light. Total XTab light
consists of XDab light formed with XEcl light passing through NE segment 234,
any ARne light reflected by it,
and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEcl
light. Total XTcc light consists of
XEcl light passing through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and
any ARne, XRcl, and XRfe light
passing through it, again usually mostly XEcl light. Including any ARis light
reflected by IS segment 192, X light
is formed with XEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl and XRfe light
leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC
portion 138.
10446) The mid-emission EN embodiment utilizes normal AEab light emission-
ARab light reflection and
temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEcl light
emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfe light reflection
and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due mostly to AEol
light emission and XRcUXRfe
light reflection. During the normal state, core layer 222 normally emits AEcl
light, usually a majority component
of A light. Total ATcl light consists of AEcl light, any ARcl light reflected
by layer 222, and any FE-structure-
reflected ARfe light passing through it, usually mostly normally emitted AEcl
light. Total ATab light consists of
ADab light formed with AEcl light passing through NE structure 224, any ARne
light reflected by it, and any ARcl
and ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly AEcl light. Total
ATcc light consists of AEcl light
passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne,
ARcl, and ARfe light passing
through it, again usually mostly AEcl light. Including any ARis light
reflected by IS component 182, A light is
formed with AEcl light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, and ARfe light normally
leaving component 182 and
thus VC region 106.
- .102 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
104471 Core layer 222 in the mid-emission EN embodiment responds to the
general CC control signal the
same as in the mixed-reflection RN embodiment, Hence, the mid-emission EN
embodiment operates the same
in the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104481 Assembly 202 in mid-emission EN or ET embodiment may be one or more
of the following light-
processing arrangements: a cathodoluminescent arrangement, an electrochromic
fluorescent arrangement, an
electrochromic luminescent arrangement, an electrochromic phosphorescent
arrangement, an
electroluminescent arrangement, an emissive microelectricalmechanicalsystem
(display) arrangement (such as
a time-multiplexed optical shutter or a backlit digital micro shutter
structure), a field-emission arrangement, a
light-emitting diode arrangement, a light-emitting electrochemical cell
arrangement, an organic light-emitting
diode arrangement, an organic light-emitting transistor arrangement, a
photoluminescent arrangement, a plasma
panel arrangement, a guantum-dot light-emitting diode arrangement, a surface-
conduction-emission
arrangement, and a vacuum fluorescent (display) arrangement.
104491 Core layer 222 in each light-processing arrangement usually contains
a multiplicity of light-emissive
elements distributed laterally uniformly across layer 222. "LE" hereafter
means light-emissive. Each LE element
lies between a small part of NE structure 224 and a generally oppositely
situated small part of FE structure 226
for which these two parts of electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy
approximately the same lateral area as
that LE element. The LE elements continuously or selectively emit light during
operation of 01 structure 200
depending on factors such as their locations in layer 222. The LE elements
reflect light constituting part or all of
the ARcl light during the normal state. Core segment 232 contains a
submultiplicity of the LE elements. The LE
elements in segment 232 reflect light constituting part or all of the XRcl
light during the changed state.
104501 During the normal state in the mid-emission ET embodiment of each
light-processing arrangement
with control voltage V11 along core layer 222 at normal value VON, the LE
elements either no light or emit light
provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves layer 222
along NE structure 224. When voltage
Vo along core segment 232 goes to value VOC to initiate the changed state, the
LE elements in segment 232
emit XEcl light, again usually a majority component of X light, leaving
segment 232. When voltage \int along
segment 232 returns to value \Inn the LE elements in segment 232 return to
emitting no light or to emitting light
provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light leaves segment 232
along NE segment 234.
104511 The opposite occurs in the mid-emission EN embodiment of each light-
processing arrangement.
With voltage Vnt along core layer 222 being value VniN during the normal
state, the LE elements emit AEcl light,
again usually a majority component of A light, leaving layer 222. When voltage
WI along core segment 232
goes to value \info to initiate the changed state, the LE elements in segment
232 either emit no light or continue
to emit light provided that little, preferably none, of the emitted light
leaves segment 232 along NE segment 234.
When voltage Vnt along core segment 232 returns to value Vntiq, the LE
elements in segment 232 return to
emitting AEcl light leaving it.
- .103 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
[0452] The LE elements are at fixed locations in core layer 222, and thus
in CC component 184, in one
version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment. In the mid-emission ET
version, the LE elements emit no
light during the normal state. In the mid-emission EN version, the LE elements
in core segment 232 largely
cease emitting light in response to the general CC control signal so as to
emit no light during the changed state.
[04531 Each LE element has an element emissive area across which AEcl light
is emitted during the
normal state in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light is emitted
during the changed state in the mid-
emission ET embodiment if that LE element is in IDVC portion 138. AEcl or XEcl
light of each LE element can
be emitted relatively uniformly across its emissive area. Alternatively, each
LE element includes three or more
LE subelements, each operable to emit light of a different one of three or
more primary colors, e.g., red, green,
and blue, combinable to produce many colors usually including white. Each LE
subelement usually emits its
primary color across a subelement emissive subarea of the emissive area of its
LE element. The standard
human eye/brain would interpret the combination of the primary colors of the
light emitted by the LE
subelements in each LE element of the mid-emission EN embodiment as color AEcl
if the AEcl light traveled to
the human eye unaccompanied by other light. The same applies to color XEcl and
XEcl light for each LE
element in portion 138 of the mid-emission ET embodiment.
104541 The radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each
element emissive area can be
programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of 01 structure 200 for
adjusting AEcl light, and thus A light,
in the mid-emission EN embodiment and XEcl light, and thus X light, in the mid-
emission ET embodiment. The
programming is performed, as necessary, for each primary color, by providing
the LE subelements operable for
emitting light of that primary color with a programming voltage that causes
them to emit light of their primary
color at radiosity suitable for the desired AEcl light in the mid-emission EN
embodiment and suitable for the
desired XEcl light in the mid-emission ET embodiment.
104551 Another version of the mid-emission ET or EN embodiment entails
providing the LE elements in a
supporting medium, usually a fluid such as a liquid, in core layer 222. The
supporting medium is a medium color
M1Rc materially different from temporary emitted core color XEcl. Hence, the
medium reflects MtRc light and
absorbs or/and transmits other light. The LE elements have electrical
characteristics, typically electrical
charging, which enable them to translate (move) in response to a changing
electric field. Also, the LE elements
are usually of an LE-element color L1Rc so as reflect Ll Rc light and absorb
or/and transmit, preferably absorb,
other light.
104561 In the mid-emission ET translating-element version, setting voltage
V at normal value Vriftl laterally
along core layer 222 results in the LE elements being normally distributed in
the medium such that, even if they
emit light, largely none of the emitted light leaves layer 222 along NE
structure 224. Specifically, the LE
elements are normally dispersed throughout the medium or situated adjacent to
FE structure 226 so as to be
averagely remote from NE structure 224. The medium absorbs any light emitted
by the LE elements and
- .104 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
traveling toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects Mi Rc light and
since the LE elements reflect Li Rc
light, ARcl light normally leaving layer 222 consists of Mi Rc light and any
Li Rc light. Total ATcl light consists of
Mi Rc light and any Li Rc and XRfe light. Any LiRc light normally leaving
layer 222 along structure 224 is of low
radiosity compared to Mi Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure
224.
104571 The Voc polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE
elements are chosen such that
the LE elements in core segment 232 translate so as to be adjacent to NE
segment 234 when voltage Vnt along
segment 232 goes to changed value Võfc. The LE elements in segment 232 then
emit XEcl light leaving it. With
XRcl light leaving segment 232 consisting of Mi Rc and Li Rc light, total XTcl
light consists of XEcl, Mi Rc, and
Li Rc light and any ARfe light so as to differ materially from the ATcl light
normally leaving core layer 222. The
same result is achieved by reversing both the VIC polarity and the
characteristics of the LE elements.
104581 The mid-emission EN translating-element version operates in the
opposite way. Setting voltage \Int
at value Vrc laterally along core layer 222 results in the LE elements
normally being adjacent to NE structure
224. The LE elements normally emit AEcl light leaving layer 222. Since the
medium reflects Mi Rc light and
since the LE elements reflect Li Rc light, ARcl light normally leaving layer
222 consists of Mi Rc and Li Rc light.
Total Aid light consists of AEcl, Mi Rc, and LiRc light and any ARfe light.
10459 j Changing voltage Vnf in core segment 232 to value VrE causes the LE
elements in segment 232 to
translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234. In particular, the
LE elements in segment 232
become dispersed throughout it or situated adjacent to FE segment 236. The
segment of the medium in core
segment 232 absorbs any light emitted by the LE elements in segment 232 and
traveling toward NE segment
234. With XRcl light leaving segment 232 consisting largely of Mi Rc light and
any Li Rc light, total XTcl light
consists largely of Mi Rc light and any Li Rc and ARfe light and differs
materially from the ATcl light normally
leaving core layer 222. Any LiRc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along
NE segment 234 is of low
radiosity compared to Mi Rc light temporarily leaving segment 232 along NE
segment 234. The same result is
again achieved by reversing both the VIC polarity and the characteristics of
the LE elements.
10460) Various mechanisms can cause the LE elements in the translating-
element version of the mid-
emission ET or EN embodiment to emit XEcl or AEcl light. The LE elements can
emit light an electrochromic
fluorescently, electrochromic luminescently, electrochromic phosphorescently,
or electroluminescently in
response to an alternating-current voltage signal imposed on voltage \iinf.
The LE elements can emit light
photoluminescently in response to electromagnetic radiation provided from a
source outside assembly 202.
"EM" hereafter means electromagnetic. The EM radiation is typically IR
radiation but can be light or UV
radiation, usually UV radiation just beyond the visible spectrum. The
radiation source is typically in FA layer 206
but can be in NA layer 204. The EM radiation can sometimes simply be ambient
light. In addition, the LE
elements can sometimes emit light naturally, i.e., without external stimulus.
-105-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 1 7/05 7934
1 046 1I The LE elements in the translating-element version of the mid-
emission ET or EN embodiment can
emit light continuously during operation of 01 structure 200. This can occur
in response to EM radiation
provided from a source of EM radiation. If so and if the EM radiation source
is capable of being switched
between radiating (on) and non-radiating (off) states, the radiation source is
usually placed in the non-radiating
state when structure 200 is out of operation so as to save power.
Alternatively, the LE elements in core
segment 232 of the mid-emission ET version can emit XEcl light in response to
the general CC control signal but
be non-emissive of light at other times. In a complementary manner, the LE
elements in segment 232 of the
mid-emission EN version can normally emit AEcl light and become non-emissive
of light in response to the
control signal.
1 046 2 1 The mid-emission EN-ET embodiment utilizes normal AEab light
emission-ARab light reflection and
temporary XEab light emission-XRab light reflection or, more specifically,
normal AEcl light emission-
ARne/ARcVARfe light reflection and temporary XEcl light emission-
ARne/XRclIXRfe light reflection respectively
due mostly to AEcl light emission and XEcl light emission. The mid-emission EN-
ET embodiment operates the
same during the normal state as the mid-emission EN embodiment. Core segment
232 in the mid-emission EN-
ET embodiment responds to the general CC control signal the same as in the mid-
emission ET embodiment.
Hence, the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same during the changed
state as the mid-emission
ET embodiment
1 0463 1 Assembly 202 in the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment can generally be
any one or more of the
above light-processing arrangements usable to implement the mid-emission EN
and ET embodiments subject to
modification of each light-processing arrangement to be capable of emitting
both AEcl light and XEcl light. In
one modification, core layer 222 contains a multiplicity of first LE elements
distributed laterally uniformly across
layer 222 and a multiplicity of second LE elements distributed laterally
uniformly across layer 222 and thus
approximately uniformly among the first LE elements. Each LE element lies
between a small part of NE
structure 224 and a generally oppositely situated small part of FE structure
226 for which these two parts of
electrode structures 224 and 226 occupy approximately the same lateral area as
that LE element. Core
segment 232 contains a submultiplicity of the first LE elements and a
submultiplicity of the second LE elements.
The mechanisms causing the first and second LE elements to emit light are the
same as those described above
for causing the LE elements in the above-described version of the mid-emission
ET or EN embodiment to emit
light.
1 0464 1 The first and second LE elements, i.e., all the properly
functioning ones, have the following light-
emitting capabilities. The first LE elements emit light of wavelength for a
first LE emitted color P1Ec during the
normal state in which voltage VI between electrode structures 226 and 224 is
at value VõfN such that P1Ec light
leaves core layer 222 and exits VC region 106. During the changed state with
voltage VI between the two parts
of structures 226 and 224 for each LE element in core segment 232 at value
VrifC, the first LE elements outside
segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222 and exiting region
106. The first LE elements in
-'106-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
segment 232 may or may not emit P1Ec light leaving segment 232 and exiting
IDVC portion 138 during the
changed state depending on which of the switching modes, described below, is
used. The circumstance of a
first LE element in segment 232 not providing light leaving portion 138 during
the changed state can be achieved
by having that element temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light
that temporarily does not leave
portion 138, e.g., due to absorption in segment 232.
104651 The second LE elements in core segment 232 emit light of wavelength
for a second LE emitted
color QlEc during the changed state such that QlEc light leaves segment 232
and exits IDVC portion 138. The
second LE elements outside segment 232 may or may not emit Q1Ec light which
leaves core layer 222 and exits
VC region 106 during the changed state depending on which of the switching
modes is used. The same applies
to the second LE elements during the normal state. The circumstance of a
second LE element not providing
light leaving region 106 during the normal or changed state can be achieved by
having that element normally or
temporarily be non-emissive or by having it emit light that normally or
temporarily does not leave region 106,
e.g., due to absorption in layer 222.
104661 Additionally, the first LE elements usually reflect light striking
them and of wavelength for a first LE
reflected color P1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably
absorbing, other incident light. PIRG light
may or may not leave core layer 222 and exit VC region 106 during the normal
and changed states. Similarly,
the second LE elements usually reflect light striking them and of wavelength
for a second LE reflected color
Q1Rc while absorbing or/and transmitting, preferably absorbing, other incident
light. Q1Rc light may or may not
leave layer 222 and exit region 106 during the normal and changed states.
104671 Subject to the preceding emission/reflection specifications, the
first and second LE elements
operate in one of the following three switching modes. In a first LE switching
mode, the first and second LE
elements respectively normally emit P1Ec and QlEc light which forms AEcl
light, usually a majority component
of A light, leaving core layer 222 along NE structure 224 and then leaving VC
region 106 via SF zone 112. Total
ATcl light consists of P1Ec and QlEc light and any ARcl and ARfe light,
usually mostly P1Ec and Q1Ec light,
where the ARcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light. The first LE elements
in core segment 232 respond to
the general CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light
leaving IDVC portion 138 via print area
118. The second LE elements in segment 232 continue to emit QlEc light which
forms XEcl light, usually a
majority component of X light, leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 and
then leaving portion 138 via
area 118. Total XTcl light consists largely of QlEc light and any XRcl and
ARfe light, usually mostly QlEc light,
where the XRcl light includes any P1Rc and Q1 Rc light.
104681 In a second LE switching mode, the first LE elements normally emit
PlEc light which forms AEcl
light, usually a majority component of A light, leaving core layer 222 along
NE structure 234 and then leaving VC
region 106 via SF zone 112. The second LE elements normally emit largely no
light leaving region 106 along
zone 112. Total ATcl light consists largely of P1Ec light and any ARcl and
ARfe light, usually mostly P1Ec light,
-'107-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
where the ARcl light again includes any P1Rc and Q1Rc light. Upon occurrence
of the general CC control
signal, the first LE elements in core segment 232 continue to emit P1Ec light
leaving it along NE segment 234
and then leaving IDVC portion .138 via print area 118. The second LE elements
in core segment 232 respond to
the general CC control signal by temporarily emitting Q1 Ec light leaving
segment 232 via NE segment 234 and
then leaving portion 138 via area 1.18. P1Ec and QlEc light form XEcl light,
usually a majority component of X
light. Total XTcl light consists of P1Ec and Q1 Ec light and any XRcl and ARfe
light, usually mostly P1Ec and
Q1Ec light, where the XRcl light again includes any P1 Rc and QlRe light.
104691 In a third LE switching mode, the first and second LE elements
operate the same during the normal
state as in the second LE switching mode. The first LE elements in core
segment 232 respond to the general
CC control signal by temporarily largely ceasing to emit light leaving IDVC
portion 138 along print area 118. The
second LE elements in segment 232 respond to the control signal by temporarily
emitting QlEc light which
forms XEcl light, usually a majority component of X light, temporarily leaving
segment 232 along NE segment
234 and then leaving portion 138 along area 118. As in the first LE switching
mode, total XTcl light consists
largely of QlEc light and any XRcl and ARfe light, usually mostly Q1 Ec light,
where the XRcl light includes any
PiRc and Q1 Rc light.
104701 The first and second LE elements are at fixed locations in core
layer 222 and thus in CC
component 184 in a version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing
each LE switching mode.
During the normal state in the version implementing the third LE switching
mode, the first LE elements emit
P1Ec light while the second LE elements emit no light. During the changed
state, the second LE elements in
core segment 232 temporarily emit QlEc light in response to the general CC
control signal while the first LE
elements in segment 232 become non-emissive in response to the control signal.
104711 When the first and second LE elements are fixedly located in core
layer 222, those LE elements
also usually have the physical characteristics of the fixed-location LE
elements in the mid-emission ET or EN
embodiment Accordingly, each first or second LE element can include three or
more LE subelements, each
operable to emit light of a different one of three or more primary colors,
e.g., again red, green, and blue,
combinable to produce many colors usually including white. The standard human
eye/brain would interpret the
combination of the primary colors of the light emitted by the first or second
LE subelements in each LE element
as color P1 Ec or QlEc if the PlEc or QlEc light traveled to the human eye
unaccompanied by other light.
104721 The radiosities of the light of the primary colors emitted from each
emissive area can be
programmably adjusted subsequent to manufacture of 01 structure 200 for
enabling AEcl and XEcl light, and
thus A and X light, to be adjusted. The programming is performed, as
necessary, for each primary color, by
providing the LE subelements operable for emitting light of that primary color
with a selected programming
voltage that causes those LE subelements to emit their primary color at
radiosities suitable for the desired AEcl
and XEcl light.
- .108 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
104731 Another version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment implementing
the third LE switching mode
entails providing the two sets of LE elements in a supporting medium, usually
a fluid such as a liquid, in core
layer 222. The supporting medium is again generally of medium color M1Rc. The
medium is preferably
transparent so that the MiRc radiosity is close to zero. The LE elements have
electrical characteristics, typically
electrical charging, which enable the second LE elements to translate
oppositely to the first LE elements in the
presence of an electric field. Setting voltage \int at normal value VntN
laterally along layer 222 causes the first LE
elements to be adjacent to NE structure 224 while the second LE elements are
averagely remote from structure
224. In particular, the second LE elements are normally dispersed throughout
the medium or situated adjacent
to FE structure 226. The first LE elements emit P1Ec light leaving layer 222
along NE structure 224 and then
VC region 106 via SF zone 112. The medium absorbs light emitted by the second
LE elements and traveling
toward structure 224. Since the medium reflects M1Rc light and since the first
and second LE elements
respectively reflect P1Rc and Q1 Re light, total ATcl light consists largely
of PlEc and PIRG light and any Q1Rc,
M1Rc, and ARfe light. Any Q1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along
structure 224 is of low radiosity
compared to P1Rc light normally leaving layer 222 along structure 224.
104741 The WIC: polarity and the characteristics, e.g., charging, of the LE
elements are chosen such that
changing voltage VI along core segment 232 to value Vflfc causes the second LE
elements in segment 232 to
translate so as to be adjacent to NE segment 234 while the first LE elements
in core segment 232 oppositely
translate so as to be averagely remote from NE segment 234. In particular, the
first LE elements in core
segment 232 become temporarily dispersed throughout the segment of the medium
in segment 232 or situated
adjacent to FE segment 236. The second LE elements in core segment 232 emit
QlEc light leaving segment
232 along NE segment 234 and then IDVC portion 138 via print area 118. The
medium absorbs light emitted by
the first LE elements in core segment 232 and traveling toward NE segment 234.
With the segment of the
medium in core segment 232 reflecting M1Rc light and with the first and second
LE elements respectively
reflecting P1Rc and Q1Rc light, total XTcl light consists largely of QlEc and
Q1 Rc light and any P1Poc, M1Rc,
and ARfe light and differs materially from the ATcl light normally leaving
core layer 222. During the changed
state, any P1Rc light leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234 is of low
radiosity compared to Q1Rc light
leaving segment 232 along NE segment 234.
104751 The first and second LE elements may emit light continuously during
operation of 01 structure 200
in the preceding version of the mid-emission EN-ET embodiment. This can occur
in response to EM radiation
provided from an EM radiation source. If so and if the radiation source can be
switched between radiating and
non-radiating states, the radiation source is usually placed in the non-
radiating state when structure 200 is out of
operation so as to save power. Alternatively, the second LE elements in core
segment 232 can emit XEcl light
in response to the general CC control signal but be non-emissive at other
times while the first LE elements emit
AEcl light continuously during operation of structure 200 or normally emit
AEcl light but become non-emissive in
response to the control signal.
-'109-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
104761 Moving to the three deep-emission embodiments of CC component 184,
FA layer 206 is utilized in
each deep-emission embodiment for emitting light in making color change. The
difference between the single
deep-emission embodiments is that light emitted by layer 206 passes through
core layer 222 only during the
changed state in the deep-emission ET embodiment but only in the normal state
in the deep-emission EN
embodiment. Light emitted by FA layer 206 passes through core layer 222 during
both states in the deep-
emission EN-ET embodiment.
104771 The deep-emission ET embodiment employs normal ARab light reflection
and temporary XEfa light
emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or, more specifically, normal
ARne/ARcVARfe light reflection and temporary
XEfa light emission-ARne/XRcVXRfe/XRfa light reflection respectively due
mostly to ARcVARfe light reflection
and XEfa light emission. The deep-emission ET embodiment is similar to the
mixed-reflection RI embodiment
except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission ET embodiment emits light and
lacks the light reflector of the
mixed-reflection RI embodiment. During the normal state, the deep-emission ET
embodiment operates the
same as the mid-emission ET embodiment and thus the same as the mid-reflection
embodiment.
104781 Core segment 232 in the deep-emission ET embodiment responds to the
general CC control signal
applied between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234
and 236 during the changed state
by allowing a substantial part of XEfa light, usually a majority component of
X light, emitted by FA segment 216
and passing through FE segment 236 to temporarily pass through core segment
232. Total Xifa light consists
of XEfa light and any XRfa light reflected by FA segment 216, usually mostly
emitted XEfa light.
104791 A substantial part of any XRfa light passes through FE segment 236
and, as allowed by core
segment 232, through it. Total XT.c1 light consists of XEfa light passing
through segment 232, any XRfa light
passing through it, any XRcl light reflected by it, and any FE-segment-
reflected XRfe light passing through it,
usually mostly XEfa light. Total XTab light consists of XEfa light passing
through NE segment 234, any XRfa
light passing through it, and any XRab light formed with any ARne light
reflected by it and any XRcl and XRfe
light passing through it, likewise usually mostly XEfa light. Total XTcc light
consists of XEfa light passing
through NA segment 214, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne, XRcl,
XRfe, and XRfa light passing
through it, again usually mostly XEfa light. Including any ARis light
reflected by IS segment 192, X light is
formed with XEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light
temporarily leaving segment 192
and thus IDVC portion 138. XEfa light is preferably a 75% majority component,
more preferably a 90% majority
component, of each of XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X light.
104801 The deep-emission EN embodiment employs normal AEfa light emission-
ARab/ARfa light reflection
and temporary XRab light reflection or, more specifically, normal AEfa light
emission-ARne/ARcVARfe/ARfa light
reflection and temporary ARne/XRcl/XRfe light reflection respectively due
mostly to AEfa light emission and
XRcl/XRfe light reflection. The deep-emission EN embodiment is similar to the
mixed-reflection RN embodiment
except that FA layer 206 in the deep-emission EN embodiment emits light and
lacks the light reflector of the
- 110 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
single mixed-reflection RN embodiment. During the normal state, core layer 222
in the deep-emission EN
embodiment allows AEfa light, usually a majority component of A light, emitted
by FA layer 206 and passing
through FE structure 226 to pass through core layer 222. Total ATfa light
consists of AEfa light and any ARfa
light reflected by FA layer 206, usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
104811 A substantial part of any ARfa light passes through FE structure 226
and, as allowed by core layer
222, through it. Total ATcl light consists of AEfa light passing through layer
222, any ARfa light passing through
it, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any FE-structure-reflected ARfe light
passing through it, usually mostly
emitted AEfa light. Total ATab light consists of AEfa light passing through NE
structure 224, any ARfa light
passing through it, and any ARab light formed with any ARne light reflected by
structure 224 and any ARcl and
ARfe light passing through it, likewise usually mostly emitted AEfa light.
Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light
passing through NA layer 204, any ARna light reflected by it, and any ARne,
ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing
through it, again usually mostly AEfa light. Including any ARis light
reflected by IS component 182, A light is
formed with AEfa light and any ARis, ARna, ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light
temporarily leaving component
182 and thus VC region 106. AEfa fight is preferably a 75% majority component,
more preferably a 90%
majority component, of each of ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A light.
104821 Core segment 232 in the deep-emission EN embodiment responds to the
general CC control signal
the same as in the mid-emission EN embodiment. Consequently, the deep-emission
EN embodiment operates
the same during the changed state as the mid-reflection embodiment.
104831 In one implementation of the deep-emission ET or EN embodiment, core
layer 222 contains
dimensionally anisotropic core particles distributed laterally across the
layer's extent and switchable between
light-transmissive and light-blocking states. The core particles have the
characteristics described above for the
implementation of the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing
dimensionally anisotropic core particles.
NA layer 204 may or may not be present in this deep-emission ET or EN
implementation. FA layer 206 in the
deep-emission ET or EN implementation contains a light emitter extending
along, and generally parallel to, FE
structure 226. The deep-emission ET or EN implementation is configured the
same as the implementation of
the mixed-reflection RT or RN embodiment utilizing anisotropic core particles
except that the light emitter
replaces the light reflector. The deep-emission ET or EN implementation
operates the same as the mixed-
reflection RT or RN implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except
as described below.
104841 The deep-emission ET implementation operates the same as the mixed-
reflection RT
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except that, during the
changed state, the combination of XEla
light emitted by the segment of the light emitter in FA segment 216 and any
XRfa light reflected by segment 216
replaces XRfa light reflected by the segment of the light reflector in segment
216. The light emitter may
continuously emit XEfa light during operation of the deep-emission ET
implementation. Alternatively, the light
-111-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
emitter may respond to the general CC control signal by emitting XEfa light
only during the changed state in
order to reduce power consumption.
104851 The deep-emission EN implementation operates the same as the mixed-
reflection RN
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles except that, during the
normal state, the combination of AEfa
light emitted by the light emitter and any ARfa light reflected by FA layer
206 replaces ARfa light reflected by the
light reflector. The light emitter usually continuously emits AEfa light
during operation of the deep-emission EN
implementation.
[0486] Core layer 222 consists of LC material formed with elongated LC
molecules constituting the core
particles in one version of the deep-emission ET or EN implementation for
which CC component 184 consists of
a reflective LC arrangement, typically polarizer-free. In another version of
the deep-emission ET or EN
implementation, layer 222 is formed with a fluid, typically a liquid, in which
dipolar particles constituting the core
particles are colloidally suspended. These two versions of the deep-emission
ET or EN implementation are
respectively configured and operable as described above for the two versions
of the mixed-reflection RT or RN
implementation utilizing anisotropic core particles formed respectively with
elongated LC molecules and with
dipolar particles subject to (a) the light emitter replacing the light
reflector, (b) the changed-state combination of
XEfa light emitted by the segment of the light emitter in FA segment 216 and
any XRfa light reflected by
segment 216 replacing XRfa light reflected by the segment of the light
reflector in segment 216, and (c) the
normal-state combination of AEfa light emitted by the light emitter and any
ARfa light reflected by FA layer 206
replacing ARfa light reflected by the light reflector.
104871 The deep-emission EN-ET embodiment employs normal AEfa light
emission-ARab/ARfa light
reflection and temporary XEfa light emission-XRab/XRfa light reflection or,
more specifically, normal AEfa light
emission-ARne/ARcl/ARfelARfa light reflection and temporary XEfa light
emission-ARne/XRcI/XRfe/XRfa light
reflection respectively due mostly to AEfa light emission and XEfa light
emission. The deep-emission EN-ET
embodiment is similar to the deep-reflection embodiment except that FA layer
206 in the deep-emission EN-ET
embodiment emits light and lacks the strong light-reflection capability of the
deep-reflection embodiment. Core
layer 222 and auxiliary layers 204 and 206 are usually employed in the deep-
emission EN-ET embodiment for
imposing certain traits, usually WI traits such as PZ traits, on light emitted
by FA layer 206 and passing through
FE structure 226, core layer 222, NE structure 224, NA layer 204, and IS
component 182. In particular, the
deep-emission EN-ET embodiment operates the same as the deep-reflection
embodiment when WI traits are
employed except as described below.
104881 During the normal state, FA layer 206 emits AEfa light, usually a
majority component of A light.
Layer 206 also typically reflects ARfa light. Total ATfa light consists of
AEfa light and any ARfa light, usually
mostly emitted AEfa light. Layer 206 typically imposes the FA trait on the
AEfa light and on at least part of the
ARfa light.
-112-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
[0489] The remaining light processing during the normal state in the deep-
emission EN-ET embodiment is
the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment except that the combination of
AEfa light and any ARfa light
replaces ARfa light. Total ATfe light consists of AEfa light passing through
FE structure 226, any ARfa light
passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly AEfa
light. ATfe light passing through core
layer 222 has the primary outgoing trait upon reaching NA layer 204. Total
ATcl light consists of AEfa light
passing through core layer 222, any ARcl light reflected by it, and any ARfe
and ARfa light passing through it,
usually mostly AEfa light having the primary outgoing trait. Total ATab light
consists of AEfa light passing
through NE structure 224, any ARfa light passing through it, and any ARab
light formed with any ARne light
reflected by structure 224 and any ARcl and ARfe light passing through it,
likewise usually mostly AEfa light.
10490! ATab light passing through NA layer 204 typically has the NA
outgoing trait upon reaching IS
component 182. Total ATcc light consists of AEfa light passing through layer
204, any ARna light reflected by it,
and any ARne, ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light passing through it, again usually
mostly AEfa light. Including any
ARis light normally reflected by component 182, A light is formed with AEfa
light and any ARis, ARna, ARne,
ARcl, ARfe, and ARfa light normally leaving component 182 and thus VC region
106. AEfa light is preferably a
75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of
ATfa, ATcl, ATab, ATcc, and A
light.
10491] During the changed state, core segment 232 responds to the general
CC control signal applied
between at least oppositely situated parts of electrode segments 234 and 236
by allowing XEfa light, usually a
majority component of X light, emitted by FA segment 216 and passing through
FE segment 236 to temporarily
pass through core segment 232. FA segment 216 typically reflects XRfa light,
usually largely ARfa light. Total
XTfa light consists of XEfa light and any XRfa light, usually mostly emitted
XEfa light. Segment 216 typically
imposes the FA trait on the XEfa light and on at least part of the XRfa light.
104921 The remaining light processing during the changed state in the deep-
emission EN-ET embodiment
is the same as in the deep-reflection embodiment except that the combination
of XEfa light and any XRfa light
replaces XRfa light Total XTfe light consists of XEfa light passing through FE
segment 236, any XRfa light
passing through it, and any ARfe light reflected by it, usually mostly XEfa
light. XTfe light passing through core
segment 232 has the changed outgoing trait upon reaching NA segment 214. Total
XTcl light consists of XEfa
light passing through core segment 232, any XRcl light reflected by it, and
any XRfe and XRfa light passing
through it, usually mostly XEfa light having the changed outgoing trait. Total
XTab light consists of XEfa light
passing through NE segment 234, any XRfa light passing through it, and any
XRab light formed with any ARne
light reflected by segment 234 and any XRcl and XRfe light passing through it,
likewise usually mostly XEfa light.
104931 XTab light passing through NA segment 214 typically has the NA
outgoing trait upon reaching IS
segment 192. Total XTcc light consists of XEfa light passing through NA
segment 214, any ARna light reflected
by it, and any ARne, XRcl, XRfe, and XRfa light passing through it, again
usually mostly XEfa light. Including
-'113-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
any ARis light reflected by IS segment 192, X light is formed with XEfa light
and any ARis, ARna, ARne, XRcl,
XRfe, and XRfa light temporarily leaving segment 192 and thus IDVC portion
138. XEfa light is preferably a
75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority component, of each of
XTfa, XTcl, XTab, XTcc, and X
light.
104941 While the primary outgoing and changed outgoing traits are
independent of wavelength, the
material difference between them is chosen to result in temporary total core
color XTcl differing materially from
normal total core color ATcl in the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment This often
results from the radiosity of
the XEfa component in the XTcl light during the changed state differing
materially from, usually being materially
less than, the radiosity of the AEfa component in the ATcl light during the
normal state due to the material
difference between the primary outgoing and changed outgoing traits so that
the XTcl and Aid light differ
materially in radiosity. Color X differs materially from color A.
104951 One embodiment of the deep-emission EN-ET embodiment of CC component
184 is a backlit LC
structure in which core layer 222 consists largely of LC material such as
nematic liquid crystal formed with
elongated LC particles. FA layer 206 contains a light emitter such as a lamp
extending parallel to, and along all
of, assembly 202 so as to emit light, usually of uniform radiosity, leaving
layer 206 along all of assembly 202.
104961 The backlit LC structure is configured the same as the reflective LC
structure of the deep-reflection
embodiment except that the light emitter replaces the light reflector. NA
layer 204 again contains a near plane
polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, NE structure 224. FA
layer 206 contains a far plane
polarizer extending along, and generally parallel to, FE structure 226 so as
to lie between structure 226 and the
light emitter. The PZ direction of the far polarizer again typically extends
perpendicular to, or parallel to, the PZ
direction of the near polarizer but can extend at a non-zero angle materially
different from 900 to the PZ direction
of the near polarizer. The backlit LC structure with perpendicular polarizers
operates the same as the reflective
LC structure with perpendicular polarizers except as described below.
104971 The light emitter emits, usually continuously during operation of 01
structure 200, AEfa light that
impinges on the far polarizer. With the emitted light consisting of p and s
directional components defined
relative to the near polarizer so that the PZ direction of the far polarizer
extends in the s direction, the far
polarizer transmits a high percentage of the s component and blocks,
preferably absorbs, the p component.
Emitted AEfa light and any reflected ARfa light passing through the far
polarizer so as to strike FE structure 226
and core layer 222 are plane polarized in the s direction. This action occurs
during both the normal and
changed states with structure 226 and layer 222.
104981 During the normal state, the combination of AEfa light and any ARfa
light undergoes the same
further processing that ARfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection
embodiment. Specifically, the LC material
causes incident s polarized AEfa light and any ARfa light to undergo a
rotation in PZ direction largely equal to
the primary LC amount. The near polarizer blocks, preferably absorbs, any
incident light plane polarized in
-'114-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
largely any direction other than the p direction so that light passing through
the near polarizer includes AEfa light
and any ARfa light plane polarized in the p direction.
104991 During the changed state, core layer 222 here responds to the
general CC control signal the same
as in the deep-reflection embodiment. The combination of XEfa light and any
XRfa light undergoes the same
further processing that XRfa light undergoes in the deep-reflection
embodiment. More particularly, to the extent
that the PZ direction of any incoming p polarized XRna light leaving the near
polarizer segment in NA segment
214 undergoes rotation in core segment 232, the LC segment in segment 232
causes incidents polarized XEfa
light and any XRfa light to undergo the same rotation in PZ direction. The
near polarizer segment in NA
segment 214 blocks, preferably absorbs, any incident light plane polarized in
any direction other than the p
direction so that light passing through the near polarizer segment in segment
214 includes XEfa light and any
XRfa light plane polarized in the p direction. The radiosity of the p plane
polarized XEfa light passing through
the near polarizer segment in segment 214 during the changed state differs
materially from, is usually materially
less than, the radiosity of the p plane polarized AEfa light passing through
the near polarizer during the normal
state because the radiosity of the s plane polarized XEfa light passing
through the far polarizer segment in FA
segment 216 during the changed state differs materially from the radiosity of
the s plane polarized AEfa light
passing through the far polarizer during the normal state due to the effective
PZ direction rotation, if any,
provided by core segment 232 during the changed state differing materially
from, usually being materially less
than, the effective PZ direction rotation provided by core layer 222 during
the normal state.
105001 Similar to what occurs with colors ARfa and XRfa in the deep-
reflection embodiment, colors AEfa
and XEfa normally have the same wavelength characteristics. However, the
material difference in radiosity
between the resultant p plane polarized XEfa light leaving NA segment 214
during the changed state and the
resultant p plane polarized AEfa light leaving NA layer 204 during the normal
state by itself, or in combination
with other reflected light leaving print area 118 during the changed state and
SF zone 112 during the normal
state enables color X to differ materially from color A. With color XEfa being
at materially lower radiosity than
color AEfa, color X is again materially lighter than color A even though even
though the wavelength
characteristics of XEfa and AEfa light are the same.
105011 The mid-emission ET, mid-emission EN-ET, deep-emission ET, and deep-
emission EN-ET
embodiments are advantageous because use of light emission to produce changed
color X enables print area
118 to be quite bright. Visibility of the color change is enhanced, especially
in dark ambient environments where
certain colors are difficult to distinguish.
-'115-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
Object-impact Structure Having Surface Structure for Protection, Pressure
Spreading, and/or Velocity Restitution
Matching
105021 Figs. 13a - 13c (collectively "Fig. 13") illustrate an extension 240
of 01 structure 130. 01 structure
240 is configured the same as structure 130, e.g., ISCC structure 132 can be
embodied as CR or CE material,
except that VC region 106 here includes a principal SF structure 242 extending
from SF zone 112 to meet ISCC
structure 132 along a flat principal structure-structure interface 244
extending parallel to zone 112. See Fig.
13a. SF structure 242 performs various functions such as protecting ISCC
structure 132 from damage and/or
spreading pressure to improve the matching between print area 118 and OC area
116 during impact on zone
112. For either of these functions, structure 242 typically consists largely
of insulating material along all of zone
112. Structure 242 may provide velocity restitution matching between SF zones
112 and 114 as discussed
below for Figs. 102a and 102b. Structure 242 is usually transparent but may
nonetheless strongly influence
principal color A or/and changed color X.
105031 Light travels through SF structure 242. ISCC structure 132 here
operates the same during the
normal state as in 01 structure 130 except that light leaving ISCC structure
132 via SF zone 112 in 01 structure
130 leaves ISCC structure 132 via interface 244 here. The total light, termed
ATic light, normally leaving
structure 132 consists of ARic light reflected by it, any AEic light emitted
by it, and any substructure-reflected
ARsb light passing through it.
105041 Substantial parts of the ARic light, any AEic light, and any ARsb
light pass through SF structure
242. Additionally, structure 242 may normally reflect light, termed ARss
light, which leaves it via SF zone 112
after striking zone 112. ARic light and any AEic, ARss, and ARsb light
normally leaving structure 242, and thus
VC region 106, form A light. Each of ADic light and either ARic or AEic light
is again usually a majority
component, preferably a 75% majority component, more preferably a 90% majority
component, of A light. ARss
light may, however, be a majority component of A light if structure 242
strongly influences principal color A.
105051 SF structure 242 usually absorbs some light. Hence, ATic light
reaching SF zone 112 so as to
leave VC region 106 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total ATic
light directly leaving ISCC structure
132 along interface 244. To the extent that light absorption by SF structure
242 is significantly wavelength
dependent, light incident on zone 112 and of wavelength significantly absorbed
by structure 242 is considerably
attenuated before reaching interface 244. ARic light reflected by ISCC
structure 132 is of comparatively low
spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity constituency of incident light
absorbed by SF structure 242 because
that light does not reach interface 244 so as to be reflected by ISCC
structure 132 and included in the ARic light
leaving structure 132. ARic light reaching zone 112 is usually of the same
spectral radiosity constituency as the
ARic light directly leaving structure 132. If ARic light leaving structure 132
is the same in both 01 structures 130
and 240, the ARic light leaving structure 240 can be of considerably different
spectral radiosity constituency than
ARic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does
not undergo such wavelength-
-'116-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/057934
dependent absorption. Insofar as undesirable, this situation is alleviated by
choosing the light-absorption
characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the
spectral radiosity constituency of ARic
light directly leaving ISCC structure 132.
105061 The circumstances differ somewhat with any AEic light emitted by
ISCC structure 132. Any
component of AEic light leaving structure 132 at wavelength significantly
absorbed by SF structure 242 is
considerably attenuated before reaching SF zone 112 due to absorption in
structure 242. AEic light reaching
zone 112 so as to leave VC region 106 can be of considerably different
spectral radiosity constituency than the
AEic light directly leaving 1SCC structure 132. If AEic light leaving
structure 132 is the same in 01 structures 130
and 240. AEic light leaving structure 240 can also be of considerably
different spectral radiosity constituency
than AEic light leaving structure 130 because it lacks structure 242 and does
not undergo such wavelength-
dependent absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated
by choosing the light-absorption
characteristics of structure 242 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the
spectral radiosity constituency of AEic
light directly leaving 1500 structure 132.
105071 Referring to Figs. 13b and 13c, item 252 is the ID segment of SF
structure 242 present in IDVC
portion 138. Print area 118, the upper surface of portion 138, is also the
upper surface of surface-structure
segment 252 here. "SS" hereafter means surface-structure. Item 254 is the ID
segment of interface 244
present in portion 138. In Figs. 13b and 13c and in analogous later side cross-
sectional drawings, ID IF
segment 254 is shown with extra thick line to clearly identify its exemplary
location along interface 244.
105081 The impact of object 104 on OC area 116 creates excess SF pressure
along area 116. The excess
SF pressure is transmitted through SF structure 242 to interface 244 for
producing excess internal pressure
along an ID distributed-pressure area 256 of interface 244. "DP" hereafter
means distributed-pressure. ID
internal DP IF area 256 is situated opposite, and laterally outwardly conforms
to, OC area 116. IF area 256 is
usually larger than, and usually extends laterally beyond, OC area 116 as
shown in the example of Figs. 13b
and 13c and as arises when structure 242 provides pressure spreading. While IF
area 256 can be smaller than
OC area 116, this results in print area 118 being even smaller than 00 area
116.
105091 1500 segment 142 responds (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the
excess internal pressure
along DP IF area 256, specifically IF segment 254, by causing 1DVC portion 138
to temporarily appear as color
X if the excess internal pressure along segment 254 meets the above-described
principal basic excess internal
pressure criteria here requiring that the excess internal pressure at a point
along interface 244 equal or exceed a
local TH value in order for the corresponding point along SF zone 112 to
temporarily appear as color X or (b) in
other general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in
response to the excess internal
pressure along segment 254 meeting the excess internal pressure criteria
sometimes dependent on other
impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments by causing portion
138 to temporarily appear as color
X. The changed state begins as portion 138 goes to a condition in which XRic
light reflected by ISCC segment
-'117-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US20 17/(157934
142 and any XEic light emitted by it temporarily leave it along IF segment
254. The total light, termed XTic light,
temporarily leaving ISCC segment 142 consists of XRic light, any XEic light,
and any substructure-reflected
XRsb light passing through it.
105101 Substantial parts of the XRic light, any XEic light, and any XRsb
light pass through ID SS segment
252. If SF structure 242 reflects ARss light during the normal state, SS
segment 252 reflects ARss light during
the changed state. XRic light and any XEic, ARss, and XRsb light leaving
segment 252, and thus IDVC portion
138, form X light. XDic light differs materially from A and ADic light Each of
XDic light and either XRic or XEic
light is again usually a majority component, preferably a 75% majority
component, more preferably a 90%
majority component, of X light. If structure 242 strongly influences A light
especially if ARss light is a majority
component of A light, ARss light usually has a significant effect on X light.
The contributions of ARss light to A
and X light are chosen so that color X materially differs from color A.
105111 Analogous to what occurs with ATic light, XTic light reaching print
area 118 so as to leave 1DVC
portion 138 can be of significantly lower radiosity than total XTic light
directly leaving ISCC segment 142 along
IF segment 254 due to light absorption by SS segment 252. To the extent that
light absorption by segment 252
is significantly wavelength dependent, light incident on area 118 and of
wavelength significantly absorbed by
segment 252 is considerably attenuated before reaching IF segment 254. XRic
light reflected by ISCC segment
142 is of comparatively low spectral radiosity at the spectral radiosity
constituency of light absorbed by SF
structure 242 because the light absorbed by SS segment 252 does not reach IF
segment 254 so as to be
reflected by ISCC segment 142 and included in the XRic light leaving segment
142. XRic light reaching area
118 is usually of the same spectral radiosity constituency as XRic light
directly leaving segment 142. If XRic
light leaving area 118 is the same in both 01 structures 130 and 240, XRic
light leaving area 118 in structure 240
can be of considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XRic
light leaving area 118 in structure 130
because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such wavelength-
dependent absorption. Insofar as
undesirable, this situation is alleviated by choosing the light-absorption
characteristics of structure 242 to
significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral radiosity constituency of
XRic light directly leaving segment
142.
105121 Analogous to what occurs with AEic light, the circumstances differ
somewhat with any XEic light
emitted by ISCC segment 142. Any component of XEic light leaving segment 142
at wavelength significantly
absorbed by SF structure 242 is considerably attenuated before reaching print
area 118 due to absorption in SS
segment 252. XEic light reaching area 118 can thus be of considerably
different spectral radiosity constituency
than XEic light directly leaving ISCC segment 142. If XEic light leaving area
118 is the same in both 01
structures 130 and 240, XEic light leaving area 118 in structure 240 so as to
leave 1DVC portion 138 can be of
considerably different spectral radiosity constituency than XEic light leaving
area 118 so as to leave portion 138
in structure 130 because it lacks SF structure 242 and does not undergo such
wavelength-dependent
absorption. To the extent undesirable, this situation is alleviated by
choosing the light-absorption characteristics
- 118 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US2017/(157934
of 01 structure 240 to significantly avoid absorbing light at the spectral
radiosity constituency of XEic light directly
leaving ISCC segment 142.
105131 SF structure 242 functions as a color filter for significantly
absorbing light of selected wavelength in
an embodiment of 01 structure 240 in which structure 242 strongly influences
principal SF color A or/and
changed SF color X. For this embodiment, total ATic light as it leaves ISCC
structure 132 along interface 244
during the normal state is of wavelength for a color termed principal internal
color ATic. Because SF structure
242 significantly absorbs light, ISCC structure 132 is not externally visible
along interface 244 as principal
internal color ATic during the normal state, Total XTic light as it leaves
ISCC segment 142 along IF segment
254 during the changed state is of wavelength for a color termed changed
internal color XTic. ISSC segment
142 is not externally visible along IF segment 254 as changed internal color
XTic during the changed state.
[05141 A selected one of internal colors ATic and XTic is a principal
comparatively light color LP. The
remaining one of colors ATic and XTic is a principal comparatively dark color
DP darker than light color LP.
Lightness L* of light color LP is usually at least 70, preferably at least 80,
more preferably at least 90. Lightness
L* of dark color DP is usually no more than 30, preferably no more than 20,
more preferably no more than 10. If
principal internal color ATic is light color LP, principal SF color A is
darker than light color LP due to the light
absorption by SF structure 242 while changed SF color X may be darker than
dark color DP depending on the
characteristics of the light absorption by structure 242 and on the lightness
of dark color DP. If changed internal
color XTic is light color LP, changed SF color X is darker than light color LP
while principal SF color A may be
darker than dark color DP. Importantly, the colors embodying colors A and X
can be significantly varied by
changing the light absorption characteristics of structure 242 without
changing ISCC structure 132.
105151 Different shades of the embodiments of colors A and X occurring in
the absence of ARss light can
be created by varying the reflection characteristics of SF structure 242,
specifically the wavelength and intensity
characteristics of ARss light, without changing ISCC structure 132. SF
structure 242 thus strongly influences
color A or/and color X.
105161 The pressure spreading performable by SF structure 242 enables print
area 118 to closely match
00 area 116 in size, shape, and location along SF zone 112. Structure 242 is a
principal pressure-spreading
structure. "PS" hereafter means pressure-spreading. Interface 244, spaced
apart from zone 112 so as to be
inside 01 structure 240, is a principal internal PS surface. ISCC structure
132 is a principal pressure-sensitive
CC structure because it is sensitive to the excess internal pressure produced
by PS structure 242 along PS
surface 244. "PSCC" hereafter means pressure sensitive color-change. ISCC
segment 142 is similarly a PSCC
segment.
105171 For the situation in which IDVC portion 138 temporarily appears as
color X if the excess internal
pressure along segment 254 meet the excess internal pressure criteria, an
understanding of the benefits of
pressure spreading on PSCC structure 132 is facilitated by first considering
what occurs during an impact in
-119-
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
similar 01 structure 130 lacking PS structure 242 in the corresponding
situation where portion 138 temporarily
appears as color X if the impact meets the basic TH impact criteria. With
reference to Figs. 6b and 6c
respectively corresponding to Figs. 13b and 13c, the impact creates excess SF
pressure along area 116. The
TH impact criteria which must be met for 1DVC portion 138 to temporarily
appear as color X in response to the
impact and which determine the size, shape, and location of print area 118
along SF zone 112 largely become
the above-described principal basic excess SF pressure criteria requiring that
the excess SF pressure at a point
along zone 112 equal or exceed a local TH value in order for that point to be
a TH CM point and temporarily
appear as color X. Since the excess SF pressure drops to zero along the
perimeter of OC area 116, print area
118 is located inside OC area 116 with the perimeters of areas 116 and 118
separated by perimeter band 120
which appears as color A during the changed state because the excess SF
pressure at each point in band 120
is less than the local TH excess SF pressure value for that point.
105181 Perimeter band 120 generally becomes smaller as the TH excess SF
pressure values decrease.
This improves the size, shape, and location matching between OC area 116 and
print area 118. However,
reducing the TH excess SF pressure values makes it easier for color change to
occur along SF zone 112 and
can result in undesired color change. The area of band 120 usually cannot be
reduced to essentially zero
without introducing reliability difficulty into 01 structure 130.
105191 Returning to Figs. 13b and 13c. PS structure 242 laterally spreads
the excess SF pressure caused
by the impact so that DP IF area 256 is laterally larger than OC area 116. An
annular band (not labeled) of
internal PS surface 244 extends between the perimeters of IF area 256 and IF
segment 254. This band lies
opposite a corresponding annular band (not separately indicated) of SF zone
112. The excess internal pressure
along IF area 256 reaches a maximum value within area 256 and drops to zero
along its perimeter. This results
in the excess internal pressure criteria not being met in the annular band
between the perimeters of area 256
and IF segment 254. The corresponding annular band of SF zone 112 appears as
color A during the changed
state. Because area 256 is laterally larger than oppositely situated OC area
116, the size and shape of the
annular band of zone 112 can be adjusted to achieve very close size, shape,
and location matching between OC
area 116 and print area 118. In effect, the pressure spreading enables
perimeter band 120 between areas 116
and 118 to be made quite small without introducing reliability difficulty into
PSCC structure 132. The same
arises when 1DVC portion 138 temporarily appears as color X if PSCC segment
142 is provided with the general
CC control signal generated in response to the excess internal impact criteria
being met and sometimes other
impact criteria also being met.
[05201 Print area 118, although shown as being smaller than OC area 116 in
Figs. 13b and 13c, can be
larger than it in 01 structure 240. The perimeters of areas 116 and 118 in
structure 240 can variously cross each
other. Print area 118 in structure 240 differs usually by no more than 20%,
preferably by no more than 15%,
more preferably by no more than 10%, even more preferably by no more than 5%,
in area from OC area 116, at
least when total OC area 124 is in SF zone 112 as arises in Fig. 13b. In Fig.
13c where area 124 extends
- 120 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/(185(173 PCT/US20 17/(157934
beyond zone 112, the same percentages apply to an imaginary variation of
structure 240 in which zone 112 is
extended to encompass all of area 124.
105211 Turning to the protective function, SF structure 242 is located
between ISCC structure 132 and the
external environment. This shields structure 132 from the external environment
In particular, protective SF
structure 242 is sufficiently thick to materially protect ISCC structure 132
from being damaged by most matter
impacting, lying on, and/or moving along SF zone 112 and thereby serves as a
protective structure. Protective
structure 242, which may be thicker than ISCC structure 132, materially
absorbs the shock of matter, including
object 104, impacting zone 112. Part of the force exerted by object 104
dissipates in structure 242 so that the
force exerted on DP IF area 256 due to the object impact is less, typically
considerably less, than the force
exerted by object 104 directly on OC area 116.
105221 SF structure 242 blocks at least 80%, preferably at least 90%, more
preferably at least 95%, of UV
radiation striking it. As a result, structure 242 materially protects ISCC
structure 132 from being damaged by UV
radiation. DP IF area 256, which is larger than IF segment 254 when protective
structure 242 performs pressure
spreading, is usually closer to segment 254 in size if structure 242 performs
the protective function but does not
(significantly) perform the PS function.
105231 Figs. 14a - 14c (collectively "Fig. 14") illustrate an embodiment
260 of 01 structure 240. 01
structure 260 is also an extension of 01 structure 180 to include SF structure
242. 1SCC structure 132 here is
formed with components 182 and 184 configured the same as in 01 structure 180.
See Fig. 14a. SF structure
242, which meets IS component 182 along interface 244, is here configured and
operable the same as in 01
structure 240.
105241 1500 structure 132 here operates the same during the normal state as
in 01 structure 180 except
that light leaving structure 132 via SF zone 112 in 01 structure 180 leaves
structure 132 via interface 244 here.
Total ATcc light consists of ARcc light and any AEcc and ARsb light leaving CC
component 184. Total ATic light
leaving IS component 182, and thus structure 132, consists of ARcc light
passing through component 182, any
AEcc and ARsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it.
Substantial parts of the ARcc light
and any AEcc, ARis, and ARsb light pass through SF structure 242. Including
any ARss light reflected by
structure 242, A light is formed with ARcc light and any AEcc, ARss, ARis, and
ARsb light normally leaving
structure 242 and therefore VC region 106.
105251 The changed-state light processing in 1500 segment 142 here is
essentially the same as in 01
structure 180 except that light leaving segment 142 via print area 118 in
structure 180 leaves segment 142 via IF
segment 254 here. See Figs. 14b and 14c. IS segment 192 provides a principal
general impact effect if the
impact meets the basic TH impact criteria. The general impact effect is
specifically provided in response to the
excess internal pressure along IF segment 254 meeting the basic excess
internal pressure criteria which
implement the TH impact criteria. Total XTcc light consists of XRcc light and
any XEcc and XRsh light leaving
-'121 -
CA 03042871 2019-05-03
WO 2018/085073 PCT/US2017/057934
CC segment 194 in response (a) in some general 01 embodiments to the general
impact effect or (b) in other
general 01 embodiments to the general CC control signal generated in response
to the effect sometimes
dependent on other impact criteria also being met in those other embodiments.
Total XTic light leaving IS
segment 192, and thus ISCC segment 142, consists of XRcc light passing through
segment 192, any XEcc and
XRsb light passing through it, and any ARis light reflected by it. Substantial
parts of the XRcc light and any
XEcc, ARis, and XRsb light pass through SS segment 252. Including any ARss
light reflected by segment 252,
X light is formed with XRcc light and any XEcc, ARss, ARis, and XRsb light
leaving segment 252 and hence
IDVC portion 138.
105261 Figs. 15a - 15c (collectively "Fig. 15"), illustrate an embodiment
270 of 01 structure 260 and thus of
01 structure 240. 01 structure 270 is also an extension of 01 structure 200 to
include SF structure 242. See Fig.
15a. ISCC structure 132 here is formed with IS component 182 and CC component
184 consisting of NA layer
204, NE structure 224, core layer 222, FE structure 226, and FA layer 206
configured the same as in 01
structure 200. SF structure 242, which again meets component 182 along
interface 244, is here configured and
operable the same as in 01 structure 260 and thus the same as in 01 structure
240.
[0527] CC component 184 here operates the same during the normal state as
in 01 structure 200. Total
ATcc light consists of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna, and ARsb light
leaving component 184. IS
component 182 here operates the same during the normal state as in structure
200 except that light leaving
component 182 via SF zone 112 in structure 200 leaves component 182 via
interface 244 here. Total ATic light
normally leaving component 182, and thus ISCC structure 132, consists of any
ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARna,
and ARsb light passing through component 182 and any ARis light reflected by
it.
105281 Substantial parts of any ARab, AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARis, ARna, and
ARsb light pass through SF
structure 242. Including any ARss light normally reflected by structure 242, A
light is formed with any ARab,
AEab, ARfa, AEfa, ARss, ARis, ARna, and ARsb light normally leaving structure
242 and thus VC region 106.
The following normal-state relationships apply here to the extent that the
indicated light species are present:
ARab, ARfa, and ARna light form ARcc light; ARab light consists of ARcl, ARne,
and ARfe light; AEab and AEfa
light form AEcc light; and AEab light consists of AEcl light.
105291 ID segments 214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 of respective subcomponents
204, 224, 222, 226, and
206 are not labeled in Fig. 15b or 15c due to spacing limitations. See Fig.
12b or 12c for identifying segments
214, 234, 232, 236, and 216 in Fig. 15b or 15c. With reference to Figs. 15b
and 15c, IS segment 192 again
provides a principal general impact effect in response to the excess internal
pressure along IF segment 254
meeting the basic excess internal pressure criteria which implement the basic
TH impact criteria. The changed-
state light processing in CC segment 194 here is then the same as in 01
structure 200. Total XTcc light consists
of any XRab, XEab, XRfa, XEfa, XRna, and XRsb light leaving segment 194 in
response (a) in some general 01
embodiments to the general impact effect or (b) in the other general 01
embodiments to the general CC control
- 122 -
DEMANDE OU BREVET VOLUMINEUX
LA PRESENTE PARTIE DE CETTE DEMANDE OU CE BREVET COMPREND
PLUS D'UN TOME.
CECI EST LE TOME 1 DE 3
CONTENANT LES PAGES 1 A 122
NOTE : Pour les tomes additionels, veuillez contacter le Bureau canadien des
brevets
JUMBO APPLICATIONS/PATENTS
THIS SECTION OF THE APPLICATION/PATENT CONTAINS MORE THAN ONE
VOLUME
THIS IS VOLUME 1 OF 3
CONTAINING PAGES 1 TO 122
NOTE: For additional volumes, please contact the Canadian Patent Office
NOM DU FICHIER / FILE NAME:
NOTE POUR LE TOME / VOLUME NOTE:
